S3S12P128J0MLHR

MC9S12P128 Reference Manual Covers also MC9S12P-Family MC9S12P96 MC9S12P64 MC9S12P32 S12 Microcontrollers MC9S12P128RMV1 Rev. 1.13 23 April 2010 freescale.com To provide the most up-to-date information, the revision of our documents on the World Wide Web will be the most current. Your printed copy may be an earlier revision. To verify you have the latest information available, refer to: http://freescale.com/ A full list of family members and options is included in the appendices. The following revision history table summarizes changes contained in this document. This document contains information for all constituent modules, with the exception of the CPU. For CPU information please refer to CPU12-1 in the CPU12 & CPU12X Reference Manual. Revision History Date April 2008 July 2008 December 2008 March 2009 Revision Level 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 PRELIMINARY Minor Corrections Added typ. IDD values Completed Electricals Minor Corrections Final Electricals Corrected section 1.11.3.4 Memory Corrected 1.7.3.16 - 1.7.3.19 SPI pin description Removed reference to MMCCTL1 register from Table 13-5 Removed item 4b from Table A-6 and A-7 Changed Version ID in Table 1-5 from $FF to $00 Added Register Summary Appendix D Updated FTMRC Blockguide . See Revision History Chapter 13 Updated CPMU Blockguide . See Revision History Chapter 7 Updated S12PMMCV1 Blockguide. See Revision History Chapter 3 Updated S12CPMU Blockguide. See Revision History Chapter 7 Description June 2009 1.11 October 2009 1.12 April 2010 1.13 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 251 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Device Overview MC9S12P-Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Port Integration Module (S12PPIMV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Memory Map Control (S12PMMCV1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 197 Freescale’s Scalable Controller Area Network (S12MSCANV3). Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B10C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM8B6CV1) Block Description . . 329 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1). . . . . . . . . . . 425 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description . . . . . . . . . . 473 Appendix A Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Appendix B Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Appendix C Package Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Appendix D Detailed Register Address Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 3 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 4 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 1Device Overview MC9S12P-Family 1.1 1.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1.2.1 MC9S12P Family Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.2.2 Chip-Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.3.1 S12 16-Bit Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.3.2 On-Chip Flash with ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.3.3 On-Chip SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.3.4 Main External Oscillator (XOSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.3.5 Internal RC Oscillator (IRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.3.6 Internal Phase-Locked Loop (IPLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.3.7 System Integrity Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.3.8 Timer (TIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.3.9 Pulse Width Modulation Module (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.3.10 Controller Area Network Module (MSCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.3.11 Serial Communication Interface Module (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.3.12 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.3.13 Analog-to-Digital Converter Module (ATD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.3.14 On-Chip Voltage Regulator (VREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.3.15 Background Debug (BDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.3.16 Debugger (DBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Device Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Part ID Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.7.1 Device Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 1.7.2 Pin Assignment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.7.3 Detailed Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 1.7.4 Power Supply Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 System Clock Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 1.9.1 Chip Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 1.9.2 Low Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Resets and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1.11.1 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1.11.2 Interrupt Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1.11.3 Effects of Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 COP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 ATD External Trigger Input Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 5 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 S12CPMU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Chapter 2 Port Integration Module (S12PPIMV1) 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 2.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 2.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 2.3.1 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 2.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2.3.3 Port A Data Register (PORTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 2.3.4 Port B Data Register (PORTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 2.3.5 Port A Data Direction Register (DDRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 2.3.6 Port B Data Direction Register (DDRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 2.3.7 PIM Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 2.3.8 Port E Data Register (PORTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 2.3.9 Port E Data Direction Register (DDRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 2.3.10 Ports A, B, E, BKGD pin Pull-up Control Register (PUCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 2.3.11 Ports A, B, E Reduced Drive Register (RDRIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.3.12 ECLK Control Register (ECLKCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 2.3.13 PIM Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 2.3.14 IRQ Control Register (IRQCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 2.3.15 PIM Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 2.3.16 Port T Data Register (PTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 2.3.17 Port T Input Register (PTIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 2.3.18 Port T Data Direction Register (DDRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.3.19 Port T Reduced Drive Register (RDRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.3.20 Port T Pull Device Enable Register (PERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.3.21 Port T Polarity Select Register (PPST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 2.3.22 PIM Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 2.3.23 Port T Routing Register (PTTRR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 2.3.24 Port S Data Register (PTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2.3.25 Port S Input Register (PTIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2.3.26 Port S Data Direction Register (DDRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 2.3.27 Port S Reduced Drive Register (RDRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 2.3.28 Port S Pull Device Enable Register (PERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 2.3.29 Port S Polarity Select Register (PPSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.3.30 Port S Wired-Or Mode Register (WOMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.3.31 PIM Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 2.3.32 Port M Data Register (PTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 2.3.33 Port M Input Register (PTIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 2.3.34 Port M Data Direction Register (DDRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 2.3.35 Port M Reduced Drive Register (RDRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.3.36 Port M Pull Device Enable Register (PERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 6 Freescale Semiconductor 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.3.37 Port M Polarity Select Register (PPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2.3.38 Port M Wired-Or Mode Register (WOMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 2.3.39 PIM Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 2.3.40 Port P Data Register (PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 2.3.41 Port P Input Register (PTIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.3.42 Port P Data Direction Register (DDRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.3.43 Port P Reduced Drive Register (RDRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 2.3.44 Port P Pull Device Enable Register (PERP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 2.3.45 Port P Polarity Select Register (PPSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 2.3.46 Port P Interrupt Enable Register (PIEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.3.47 Port P Interrupt Flag Register (PIFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.3.48 PIM Reserved Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.3.49 Port J Data Register (PTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.3.50 Port J Input Register (PTIJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.3.51 Port J Data Direction Register (DDRJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.3.52 Port J Reduced Drive Register (RDRJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 2.3.53 Port J Pull Device Enable Register (PERJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 2.3.54 Port J Polarity Select Register (PPSJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 2.3.55 Port J Interrupt Enable Register (PIEJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 2.3.56 Port J Interrupt Flag Register (PIFJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 2.3.57 Port AD Data Register (PT0AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 2.3.58 Port AD Data Register (PT1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 2.3.59 Port AD Data Direction Register (DDR0AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 2.3.60 Port AD Data Direction Register (DDR1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 2.3.61 Port AD Reduced Drive Register (RDR0AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 2.3.62 Port AD Reduced Drive Register (RDR1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 2.3.63 Port AD Pull Up Enable Register (PER0AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 2.3.64 Port AD Pull Up Enable Register (PER1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2.3.65 PIM Reserved Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2.4.2 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2.4.3 Pins and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 2.4.4 Pin interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Initialization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 2.5.1 Port Data and Data Direction Register writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Chapter 3 Memory Map Control (S12PMMCV1) 3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 3.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 3.1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3.1.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3.1.4 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3.1.5 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 7 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3.4.1 MCU Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3.4.2 Memory Map Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Implemented Memory in the System Memory Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 3.5.1 Chip Bus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 3.5.2 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 3.6.1 CALL and RTC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Chapter 4 Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1) 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4.1.3 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 4.1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 4.3.1 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.4.1 S12S Exception Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.4.2 Interrupt Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.4.3 Reset Exception Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 4.4.4 Exception Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.5.1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.5.2 Interrupt Nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.5.3 Wake Up from Stop or Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Chapter 5 Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1) 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 5.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 5.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 5.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 5.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 5.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 5.3.3 Family ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.2 5.3 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 8 Freescale Semiconductor 5.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.4.1 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.4.2 Enabling and Activating BDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.4.3 BDM Hardware Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 5.4.4 Standard BDM Firmware Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 5.4.5 BDM Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.4.6 BDM Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 5.4.7 Serial Interface Hardware Handshake Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 5.4.8 Hardware Handshake Abort Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 5.4.9 SYNC — Request Timed Reference Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 5.4.10 Instruction Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 5.4.11 Serial Communication Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Chapter 6 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 6.1.1 Glossary Of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 6.1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.1.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.1.4 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 6.1.5 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 6.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 6.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 6.4.1 S12SDBG Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 6.4.2 Comparator Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 6.4.3 Match Modes (Forced or Tagged) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 6.4.4 State Sequence Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 6.4.5 Trace Buffer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 6.4.6 Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 6.4.7 Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 6.5.1 State Machine scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 6.5.2 Scenario 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 6.5.3 Scenario 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 6.5.4 Scenario 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 6.5.5 Scenario 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 6.5.6 Scenario 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 6.5.7 Scenario 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 6.5.8 Scenario 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 6.5.9 Scenario 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 6.5.10 Scenario 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 6.5.11 Scenario 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 9 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Chapter 7 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 7.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 7.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 7.1.3 S12CPMU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 7.2.1 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 7.2.2 EXTAL and XTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 7.2.3 TEMPSENSE — temperature sensor output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 7.2.4 VDDR — Regulator Power Input Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 7.2.5 VDDA, VSSA — Regulator Reference Supply Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 7.2.6 VSS, VSSPLL— Ground Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 7.2.7 VDDX, VSSX— Pad Supply Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 7.2.8 API_EXTCLK — API external clock output pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 7.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 7.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 7.4.1 Phase Locked Loop with Internal Filter (PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 7.4.2 Startup from Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 7.4.3 Stop Mode using PLLCLK as Bus Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 7.4.4 Full Stop Mode using Oscillator Clock as Bus Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 7.4.5 External Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 7.4.6 System Clock Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 7.5.2 Description of Reset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 7.5.3 Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 7.5.4 Low-Voltage Reset (LVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 7.6.1 Description of Interrupt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 Chapter 8 Freescale’s Scalable Controller Area Network (S12MSCANV3) 8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 8.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 8.1.2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 8.1.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 8.1.4 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 8.2.1 RXCAN — CAN Receiver Input Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 8.2.2 TXCAN — CAN Transmitter Output Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 8.2 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 10 Freescale Semiconductor 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.2.3 CAN System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 8.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 8.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 8.3.3 Programmer’s Model of Message Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 8.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 8.4.2 Message Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 8.4.3 Identifier Acceptance Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 8.4.4 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 8.4.5 Low-Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 8.4.6 Reset Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 8.4.7 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 8.5.1 MSCAN initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 8.5.2 Bus-Off Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Chapter 9 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B10C) 9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 9.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 9.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 9.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 9.2.1 Detailed Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 9.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 9.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 9.4.1 Analog Sub-Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 9.4.2 Digital Sub-Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 Chapter 10 Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM8B6CV1) Block Description 10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 10.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 10.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 10.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 10.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 10.2.1 PWM5 — Pulse Width Modulator Channel 5 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 10.2.2 PWM4 — Pulse Width Modulator Channel 4 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 10.2.3 PWM3 — Pulse Width Modulator Channel 3 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 11 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.2.4 PWM2 — Pulse Width Modulator Channel 2 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 10.2.5 PWM1 — Pulse Width Modulator Channel 1 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 10.2.6 PWM0 — Pulse Width Modulator Channel 0 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 10.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 10.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 10.4.1 PWM Clock Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 10.4.2 PWM Channel Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Chapter 11 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 11.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 11.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 11.1.3 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 11.1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 11.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 11.2.1 TXD — Transmit Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 11.2.2 RXD — Receive Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 11.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 11.3.1 Module Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 11.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 11.4.1 Infrared Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 11.4.2 LIN Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 11.4.3 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 11.4.4 Baud Rate Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 11.4.5 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 11.4.6 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 11.4.7 Single-Wire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 11.4.8 Loop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 11.5 Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 11.5.1 Reset Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 11.5.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 11.5.3 Interrupt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 11.5.4 Recovery from Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 11.5.5 Recovery from Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Chapter 12 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) 12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 12 Freescale Semiconductor 12.1.1 Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 12.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 12.1.3 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 12.1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 12.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 12.2.1 MOSI — Master Out/Slave In Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 12.2.2 MISO — Master In/Slave Out Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 12.2.3 SS — Slave Select Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 12.2.4 SCK — Serial Clock Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 12.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 12.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 12.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 12.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 12.4.1 Master Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 12.4.2 Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 12.4.3 Transmission Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 12.4.4 SPI Baud Rate Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 12.4.5 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 12.4.6 Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 12.4.7 Low Power Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Chapter 13 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 13.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 13.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 13.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 13.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 13.3 Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 13.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 13.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 13.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 13.4.1 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 13.4.2 IFR Version ID Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 13.4.3 Flash Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 13.4.4 Allowed Simultaneous P-Flash and D-Flash Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 13.4.5 Flash Command Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 13.4.6 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 13.4.7 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 13.4.8 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 13.5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 13.5.1 Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 13.5.2 Unsecuring the MCU in Special Single Chip Mode using BDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 13.5.3 Mode and Security Effects on Flash Command Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 13.6 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 13 Chapter 14 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 14.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 14.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 14.1.3 Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 14.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.1 IOC7 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 7 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.2 IOC6 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 6 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.3 IOC5 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 5 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.4 IOC4 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 4 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.5 IOC3 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 3 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.6 IOC2 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 2 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 14.2.7 IOC1 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 1 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 14.2.8 IOC0 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 0 Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 14.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 14.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 14.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 14.4.1 Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 14.4.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 14.4.3 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 14.4.4 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 14.4.5 Event Counter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 14.4.6 Gated Time Accumulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 14.5 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.6 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.6.1 Channel [7:0] Interrupt (C[7:0]F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.6.2 Pulse Accumulator Input Interrupt (PAOVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt (PAOVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.6.4 Timer Overflow Interrupt (TOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Appendix A Electrical Characteristics A.1 General A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 A.1.5 A.1.6 A.1.7 A.1.8 A.1.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Current Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 ESD Protection and Latch-up Immunity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 I/O Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 14 Freescale Semiconductor A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11 A.1.10 Supply Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 ATD Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 A.2.1 ATD Operating Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 A.2.2 Factors Influencing Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 A.2.3 ATD Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 NVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 A.3.1 Timing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 A.3.2 NVM Reliability Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Phase Locked Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 A.4.1 Jitter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 A.4.2 Electrical Characteristics for the PLL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Electrical Characteristics for the IRC1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Electrical Characteristics for the Oscillator (OSCLCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Reset Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Electrical Specification for Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Chip Power-up and Voltage Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 MSCAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 SPI Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 A.11.1 Master Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 A.11.2 Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Appendix B Ordering Information Appendix C Package Information C.1 80 QFP Package Mechanical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 C.2 48 QFN Package Mechanical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 C.3 64 LQFP Package Mechanical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Appendix D Detailed Register Address Map D.1 Detailed Register Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 15 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 16 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 1 Device Overview MC9S12P-Family 1.1 Introduction The MC9S12P family is an optimized, automotive, 16-bit microcontroller product line focused on lowcost, high-performance, and low pin-count. This family is intended to bridge between high-end 8-bit microcontrollers and high-performance 16-bit microcontrollers, such as the MC9S12XS family. The MC9S12P family is targeted at generic automotive applications requiring CAN or LIN/J2602 communication. Typical examples of these applications include body controllers, occupant detection, door modules, seat controllers, RKE receivers, smart actuators, lighting modules, and smart junction boxes. The MC9S12P family uses many of the same features found on the MC9S12XS family, including error correction code (ECC) on flash memory, a separate data-flash module for diagnostic or data storage, a fast analog-to-digital converter (ATD) and a frequency modulated phase locked loop (IPLL) that improves the EMC performance. The MC9S12P family deliver all the advantages and efficiencies of a 16-bit MCU while retaining the low cost, power consumption, EMC, and code-size efficiency advantages currently enjoyed by users of Freescale’s existing 8-bit and 16-bit MCU families. Like the MC9S12XS family, the MC9S12P family run 16-bit wide accesses without wait states for all peripherals and memories. The MC9S12P family is available in 80-pin QFP, 64-pin LQFP, and 48-pin QFN package options and aims to maximize pin compatibility with the MC9S12XS family. In addition to the I/O ports available in each module, further I/O ports are available with interrupt capability allowing wake-up from stop or wait modes. 1.2 Features This section describes the key features of the MC9S12P family. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 17 Device Overview MC9S12P-Family 1.2.1 MC9S12P Family Comparison Table 1 provides a summary of different members of the MC9S12P family and their proposed features. This information is intended to provide an understanding of the range of functionality offered by this microcontroller family. Table 1. MC9S12P Family Feature CPU Flash memory (ECC) Data flash (ECC) RAM MSCAN SCI SPI Timer PWM ADC Frequency modulated PLL External oscillator (4 – 16 MHz Pierce with loop control) Internal 1 MHz RC oscillator Supply voltage Execution speed 2 Kbytes 4 Kbytes 1 1 1 8 ch x 16-bit 6 ch x 8-bit 10 ch x 12-bit Yes Yes 32 Kbytes 64 Kbytes 4 Kbytes 6 Kbytes MC9S12P32 MC9S12P64 CPU12-V1 96 Kbytes 128 Kbytes MC9S12P96 MC9S12P128 Yes 3.15 V – 5.5 V Static(1) – 32 MHz Package 80 QFP, 64 LQFP, 48 QFN 1. P or D Flash erasing or programming requires a minimum bus frequency of 1MHz 1.2.2 Chip-Level Features On-chip modules available within the family include the following features: • S12 CPU core • Up to 128 Kbyte on-chip flash with ECC • 4 Kbyte data flash with ECC • Up to 6 Kbyte on-chip SRAM • Phase locked loop (IPLL) frequency multiplier with internal filter • 4–16 MHz amplitude controlled Pierce oscillator • 1 MHz internal RC oscillator • Timer module (TIM) supporting input/output channels that provide a range of 16-bit input capture, output compare, counter, and pulse accumulator functions S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 18 Freescale Semiconductor Device Overview MC9S12P-Family • • • • • • • Pulse width modulation (PWM) module with 6 x 8-bit channels 10-channel, 12-bit resolution successive approximation analog-to-digital converter (ATD) One serial peripheral interface (SPI) module One serial communication interface (SCI) module supporting LIN communications One multi-scalable controller area network (MSCAN) module (supporting CAN protocol 2.0A/B) On-chip voltage regulator (VREG) for regulation of input supply and all internal voltages Autonomous periodic interrupt (API) 1.3 Module Features The following sections provide more details of the modules implemented on the MC9S12P family. 1.3.1 S12 16-Bit Central Processor Unit (CPU) S12 CPU is a high-speed 16-bit processing unit: • Full 16-bit data paths supports efficient arithmetic operation and high-speed math execution • Includes many single-byte instructions. This allows much more efficient use of ROM space. • Extensive set of indexed addressing capabilities, including: — Using the stack pointer as an indexing register in all indexed operations — Using the program counter as an indexing register in all but auto increment/decrement mode — Accumulator offsets using A, B, or D accumulators — Automatic index predecrement, preincrement, postdecrement, and postincrement (by –8 to +8) 1.3.2 On-Chip Flash with ECC On-chip flash memory on the MC9S12P features the following: • Up to 128 Kbyte of program flash memory — 32 data bits plus 7 syndrome ECC (error correction code) bits allow single bit error correction and double fault detection — Erase sector size 512 bytes — Automated program and erase algorithm — User margin level setting for reads — Protection scheme to prevent accidental program or erase • 4 Kbyte data flash space — 16 data bits plus 6 syndrome ECC (error correction code) bits allow single bit error correction and double fault detection — Erase sector size 256 bytes — Automated program and erase algorithm — User margin level setting for reads S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 19 Device Overview MC9S12P-Family 1.3.3 • On-Chip SRAM Up to 6 Kbytes of general-purpose RAM 1.3.4 • Main External Oscillator (XOSC) Loop control Pierce oscillator using a 4 MHz to 16 MHz crystal — Current gain control on amplitude output — Signal with low harmonic distortion — Low power — Good noise immunity — Eliminates need for external current limiting resistor — Transconductance sized for optimum start-up margin for typical crystals 1.3.5 • Internal RC Oscillator (IRC) Trimmable internal reference clock. — Frequency: 1 MHz — Trimmed accuracy over –40˚C to +125˚C ambient temperature range: ±1.5% 1.3.6 • Internal Phase-Locked Loop (IPLL) Phase-locked-loop clock frequency multiplier — No external components required — Reference divider and multiplier allow large variety of clock rates — Automatic bandwidth control mode for low-jitter operation — Automatic frequency lock detector — Configurable option to spread spectrum for reduced EMC radiation (frequency modulation) — Reference clock sources: – External 4–16 MHz resonator/crystal (XOSC) – Internal 1 MHz RC oscillator (IRC) 1.3.7 • • • • • • System Integrity Support Power-on reset (POR) System reset generation Illegal address detection with reset Low-voltage detection with interrupt or reset Real time interrupt (RTI) Computer operating properly (COP) watchdog — Configurable as window COP for enhanced failure detection S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 20 Freescale Semiconductor Device Overview MC9S12P-Family • — Initialized out of reset using option bits located in flash memory Clock monitor supervising the correct function of the oscillator 1.3.8 • • • Timer (TIM) 8 x 16-bit channels for input capture or output compare 16-bit free-running counter with 7-bit precision prescaler 1 x 16-bit pulse accumulator 1.3.9 • Pulse Width Modulation Module (PWM) 6 channel x 8-bit or 3 channel x 16-bit pulse width modulator — Programmable period and duty cycle per channel — Center-aligned or left-aligned outputs — Programmable clock select logic with a wide range of frequencies 1.3.10 • Controller Area Network Module (MSCAN) • • • • • • • • 1 Mbit per second, CAN 2.0 A, B software compatible — Standard and extended data frames — 0–8 bytes data length — Programmable bit rate up to 1 Mbps Five receive buffers with FIFO storage scheme Three transmit buffers with internal prioritization Flexible identifier acceptance filter programmable as: — 2 x 32-bit — 4 x 16-bit — 8 x 8-bit Wakeup with integrated low pass filter option Loop back for self test Listen-only mode to monitor CAN bus Bus-off recovery by software intervention or automatically 16-bit time stamp of transmitted/received messages 1.3.11 • • • • Serial Communication Interface Module (SCI) Full-duplex or single-wire operation Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format Selectable IrDA 1.4 return-to-zero-inverted (RZI) format with programmable pulse widths 13-bit baud rate selection S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 21 Device Overview MC9S12P-Family • • • • Programmable character length Programmable polarity for transmitter and receiver Active edge receive wakeup Break detect and transmit collision detect supporting LIN 1.3.12 • • • • • • Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Configurable 8- or 16-bit data size Full-duplex or single-wire bidirectional Double-buffered transmit and receive Master or slave mode MSB-first or LSB-first shifting Serial clock phase and polarity options 1.3.13 • Analog-to-Digital Converter Module (ATD) • 10-channel, 12-bit analog-to-digital converter — 3 us single conversion time — 8-/10-/12-bit resolution — Left or right justified result data — Internal oscillator for conversion in stop modes — Wakeup from low power modes on analog comparison > or CompB_Addr) In the Outside Range comparator mode, comparator pair A and B can be configured for range comparisons. A single match condition on either of the comparators is recognized as valid. An aligned word access which straddles the range boundary is valid only if the aligned address is outside the range. Outside range mode in combination with tagging can be used to detect if the opcode fetches are from an unexpected range. In forced match mode the outside range match would typically be activated at any interrupt vector fetch or register access. This can be avoided by setting the upper range limit to $3FFFF or lower range limit to $00000 respectively. 6.4.3 Match Modes (Forced or Tagged) Match modes are used as qualifiers for a state sequencer change of state. The Comparator control register TAG bits select the match mode. The modes are described in the following sections. 6.4.3.1 Forced Match When configured for forced matching, a comparator channel match can immediately initiate a transition to the next state sequencer state whereby the corresponding flags in DBGSR are set. The state control register for the current state determines the next state. Forced matches are typically generated 2-3 bus cycles after the final matching address bus cycle, independent of comparator RWE/RW settings. Furthermore since opcode fetches occur several cycles before the opcode execution a forced match of an opcode address typically precedes a tagged match at the same address. 6.4.3.2 Tagged Match If a CPU taghit occurs a transition to another state sequencer state is initiated and the corresponding DBGSR flags are set. For a comparator related taghit to occur, the DBG must first attach tags to instructions as they are fetched from memory. When the tagged instruction reaches the execution stage of the instruction queue a taghit is generated by the CPU. This can initiate a state sequencer transition. 6.4.3.3 Immediate Trigger Independent of comparator matches it is possible to initiate a tracing session and/or breakpoint by writing to the TRIG bit in DBGC1. If configured for begin aligned tracing, this triggers the state sequencer into the Final State, if configured for end alignment, setting the TRIG bit disarms the module, ending the session and issues a forced breakpoint request to the CPU. It is possible to set both TRIG and ARM simultaneously to generate an immediate trigger, independent of the current state of ARM. 6.4.3.4 Channel Priorities In case of simultaneous matches the priority is resolved according to Table 6-36. The lower priority is suppressed. It is thus possible to miss a lower priority match if it occurs simultaneously with a higher priority. The priorities described in Table 6-36 dictate that in the case of simultaneous matches, the match pointing to final state has highest priority followed by the lower channel number (0,1,2). S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 179 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) Table 6-36. Channel Priorities Priority Highest Source TRIG Channel pointing to Final State Match0 (force or tag hit) Match1 (force or tag hit) Lowest Match2 (force or tag hit) Action Enter Final State Transition to next state as defined by state control registers Transition to next state as defined by state control registers Transition to next state as defined by state control registers Transition to next state as defined by state control registers 6.4.4 State Sequence Control ARM = 0 State 0 (Disarmed) ARM = 1 State1 ARM = 0 Session Complete (Disarm) Final State ARM = 0 State3 State2 Figure 6-24. State Sequencer Diagram The state sequencer allows a defined sequence of events to provide a trigger point for tracing of data in the trace buffer. Once the DBG module has been armed by setting the ARM bit in the DBGC1 register, then state1 of the state sequencer is entered. Further transitions between the states are then controlled by the state control registers and channel matches. From Final State the only permitted transition is back to the disarmed state0. Transition between any of the states 1 to 3 is not restricted. Each transition updates the SSF[2:0] flags in DBGSR accordingly to indicate the current state. Alternatively writing to the TRIG bit in DBGSC1, provides an immediate trigger independent of comparator matches. Independent of the state sequencer, each comparator channel can be individually configured to generate an immediate breakpoint when a match occurs through the use of the BRK bits in the DBGxCTL registers. Thus it is possible to generate an immediate breakpoint on selected channels, whilst a state sequencer transition can be initiated by a match on other channels. If a debug session is ended by a match on a channel the state sequencer transitions through Final State for a clock cycle to state0. This is independent of tracing and breakpoint activity, thus with tracing and breakpoints disabled, the state sequencer enters state0 and the debug module is disarmed. 6.4.4.1 Final State On entering Final State a trigger may be issued to the trace buffer according to the trace alignment control as defined by the TALIGN bit (see 6.3.2.3”). If the TSOURCE bit in DBGTCR is clear then the trace buffer S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 180 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) is disabled and the transition to Final State can only generate a breakpoint request. In this case or upon completion of a tracing session when tracing is enabled, the ARM bit in the DBGC1 register is cleared, returning the module to the disarmed state0. If tracing is enabled a breakpoint request can occur at the end of the tracing session. If neither tracing nor breakpoints are enabled then when the final state is reached it returns automatically to state0 and the debug module is disarmed. 6.4.5 Trace Buffer Operation The trace buffer is a 64 lines deep by 20-bits wide RAM array. The DBG module stores trace information in the RAM array in a circular buffer format. The system accesses the RAM array through a register window (DBGTBH:DBGTBL) using 16-bit wide word accesses. After each complete 20-bit trace buffer line is read, an internal pointer into the RAM increments so that the next read receives fresh information. Data is stored in the format shown in Table 6-37 and Table 6-40. After each store the counter register DBGCNT is incremented. Tracing of CPU activity is disabled when the BDM is active. Reading the trace buffer whilst the DBG is armed returns invalid data and the trace buffer pointer is not incremented. 6.4.5.1 Trace Trigger Alignment Using the TALIGN bit (see 6.3.2.3) it is possible to align the trigger with the end or the beginning of a tracing session. If end alignment is selected, tracing begins when the ARM bit in DBGC1 is set and State1 is entered; the transition to Final State signals the end of the tracing session. Tracing with Begin-Trigger starts at the opcode of the trigger. Using end alignment or when the tracing is initiated by writing to the TRIG bit whilst configured for begin alignment, tracing starts in the second cycle after the DBGC1 write cycle. 6.4.5.1.1 Storing with Begin Trigger Alignment Storing with begin alignment, data is not stored in the Trace Buffer until the Final State is entered. Once the trigger condition is met the DBG module remains armed until 64 lines are stored in the Trace Buffer. If the trigger is at the address of the change-of-flow instruction the change of flow associated with the trigger is stored in the Trace Buffer. Using begin alignment together with tagging, if the tagged instruction is about to be executed then the trace is started. Upon completion of the tracing session the breakpoint is generated, thus the breakpoint does not occur at the tagged instruction boundary. 6.4.5.1.2 Storing with End Trigger Alignment Storing with end alignment, data is stored in the Trace Buffer until the Final State is entered, at which point the DBG module becomes disarmed and no more data is stored. If the trigger is at the address of a change of flow instruction, the trigger event is not stored in the Trace Buffer. If all trace buffer lines have been used before a trigger event occurrs then the trace continues at the first line, overwriting the oldest entries. 6.4.5.2 Trace Modes Four trace modes are available. The mode is selected using the TRCMOD bits in the DBGTCR register. Tracing is enabled using the TSOURCE bit in the DBGTCR register. The modes are described in the following subsections. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 181 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) 6.4.5.2.1 Normal Mode In Normal Mode, change of flow (COF) program counter (PC) addresses are stored. COF addresses are defined as follows: • Source address of taken conditional branches (long, short, bit-conditional, and loop primitives) • Destination address of indexed JMP, JSR, and CALL instruction • Destination address of RTI, RTS, and RTC instructions • Vector address of interrupts, except for BDM vectors LBRA, BRA, BSR, BGND as well as non-indexed JMP, JSR, and CALL instructions are not classified as change of flow and are not stored in the trace buffer. Stored information includes the full 18-bit address bus and information bits, which contains a source/destination bit to indicate whether the stored address was a source address or destination address. NOTE When a COF instruction with destination address is executed, the destination address is stored to the trace buffer on instruction completion, indicating the COF has taken place. If an interrupt occurs simultaneously then the next instruction carried out is actually from the interrupt service routine. The instruction at the destination address of the original program flow gets executed after the interrupt service routine. In the following example an IRQ interrupt occurs during execution of the indexed JMP at address MARK1. The BRN at the destination (SUB_1) is not executed until after the IRQ service routine but the destination address is entered into the trace buffer to indicate that the indexed JMP COF has taken place. MARK1 MARK2 SUB_1 LDX JMP NOP BRN NOP DBNE LDAB STAB RTI #SUB_1 0,X ; IRQ interrupt occurs during execution of this ; ; JMP Destination address TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 1 ; RTI Destination address TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 3 ; ; Source address TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 4 ; IRQ Vector $FFF2 = TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 2 ; * ADDR1 IRQ_ISR A,PART5 #$F0 VAR_C1 The execution flow taking into account the IRQ is as follows MARK1 IRQ_ISR LDX JMP LDAB STAB RTI BRN NOP DBNE #SUB_1 0,X #$F0 VAR_C1 * A,PART5 ; ; ; ; ; SUB_1 ADDR1 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 182 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) 6.4.5.2.2 Loop1 Mode Loop1 Mode, similarly to Normal Mode also stores only COF address information to the trace buffer, it however allows the filtering out of redundant information. The intent of Loop1 Mode is to prevent the Trace Buffer from being filled entirely with duplicate information from a looping construct such as delays using the DBNE instruction or polling loops using BRSET/BRCLR instructions. Immediately after address information is placed in the Trace Buffer, the DBG module writes this value into a background register. This prevents consecutive duplicate address entries in the Trace Buffer resulting from repeated branches. Loop1 Mode only inhibits consecutive duplicate source address entries that would typically be stored in most tight looping constructs. It does not inhibit repeated entries of destination addresses or vector addresses, since repeated entries of these would most likely indicate a bug in the user’s code that the DBG module is designed to help find. 6.4.5.2.3 Detail Mode In Detail Mode, address and data for all memory and register accesses is stored in the trace buffer. This mode is intended to supply additional information on indexed, indirect addressing modes where storing only the destination address would not provide all information required for a user to determine where the code is in error. This mode also features information bit storage to the trace buffer, for each address byte storage. The information bits indicate the size of access (word or byte) and the type of access (read or write). When tracing in Detail Mode, all cycles are traced except those when the CPU is either in a free or opcode fetch cycle. 6.4.5.2.4 Compressed Pure PC Mode In Compressed Pure PC Mode, the PC addresses of all executed opcodes, including illegal opcodes are stored. A compressed storage format is used to increase the effective depth of the trace buffer. This is achieved by storing the lower order bits each time and using 2 information bits to indicate if a 64 byte boundary has been crossed, in which case the full PC is stored. Each Trace Buffer row consists of 2 information bits and 18 PC address bits NOTE: When tracing is terminated using forced breakpoints, latency in breakpoint generation means that opcodes following the opcode causing the breakpoint can be stored to the trace buffer. The number of opcodes is dependent on program flow. This can be avoided by using tagged breakpoints. 6.4.5.3 Trace Buffer Organization (Normal, Loop1, Detail modes) ADRH, ADRM, ADRL denote address high, middle and low byte respectively. The numerical suffix refers to the tracing count. The information format for Loop1 and Normal modes is identical. In Detail mode, the address and data for each entry are stored on consecutive lines, thus the maximum number of entries is 32. In this case DBGCNT bits are incremented twice, once for the address line and once for the data line, on S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 183 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) each trace buffer entry. In Detail mode CINF comprises of R/W and size access information (CRW and CSZ respectively). Single byte data accesses in Detail Mode are always stored to the low byte of the trace buffer (DATAL) and the high byte is cleared. When tracing word accesses, the byte at the lower address is always stored to trace buffer byte1 and the byte at the higher address is stored to byte0. Table 6-37. Trace Buffer Organization (Normal,Loop1,Detail modes) Mode Entry Number 4-bits Field 2 CINF1,ADRH1 0 CINF2,ADRH2 0 PCH1 PCH2 8-bits Field 1 ADRM1 DATAH1 ADRM2 DATAH2 PCM1 PCM2 8-bits Field 0 ADRL1 DATAL1 ADRL2 DATAL2 PCL1 PCL2 Entry 1 Detail Mode Entry 2 Normal/Loop1 Modes Entry 1 Entry 2 6.4.5.3.1 Information Bit Organization The format of the bits is dependent upon the active trace mode as described below. Field2 Bits in Detail Mode Bit 3 CSZ Bit 2 CRW Bit 1 Bit 0 ADDR[17] ADDR[16] Figure 6-25. Field2 Bits in Detail Mode In Detail Mode the CSZ and CRW bits indicate the type of access being made by the CPU. Table 6-38. Field Descriptions Bit 3 CSZ 2 CRW Description Access Type Indicator— This bit indicates if the access was a byte or word size when tracing in Detail Mode 0 Word Access 1 Byte Access Read Write Indicator — This bit indicates if the corresponding stored address corresponds to a read or write access when tracing in Detail Mode. 0 Write Access 1 Read Access Address Bus bit 17— Corresponds to system address bus bit 17. Address Bus bit 16— Corresponds to system address bus bit 16. 1 ADDR[17] 0 ADDR[16] S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 184 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) Field2 Bits in Normal and Loop1 Modes Bit 3 CSD Bit 2 CVA Bit 1 PC17 Bit 0 PC16 Figure 6-26. Information Bits PCH Table 6-39. PCH Field Descriptions Bit 3 CSD Description Source Destination Indicator — In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit indicates if the corresponding stored address is a source or destination address. This bit has no meaning in Compressed Pure PC mode. 0 Source Address 1 Destination Address Vector Indicator — In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit indicates if the corresponding stored address is a vector address. Vector addresses are destination addresses, thus if CVA is set, then the corresponding CSD is also set. This bit has no meaning in Compressed Pure PC mode. 0 Non-Vector Destination Address 1 Vector Destination Address Program Counter bit 17— In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit corresponds to program counter bit 17. Program Counter bit 16— In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit corresponds to program counter bit 16. 2 CVA 1 PC17 0 PC16 6.4.5.4 Trace Buffer Organization (Compressed Pure PC mode) Table 6-40. Trace Buffer Organization Example (Compressed PurePC mode) 2-bits Line Number Field 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 00 11 01 00 10 00 0 PC4 0 6-bits Field 2 6-bits Field 1 PC1 (Initial 18-bit PC Base Address) PC3 0 PC6 (New 18-bit PC Base Address) PC8 PC9 (New 18-bit PC Base Address) PC7 PC2 PC5 6-bits Field 0 Mode Compressed Pure PC Mode NOTE Configured for end aligned triggering in compressed PurePC mode, then after rollover it is possible that the oldest base address is overwritten. In this case all entries between the pointer and the next base address have lost their base address following rollover. For example in Table 6-40 if one line of rollover has occurred, Line 1, PC1, is overwritten with a new entry. Thus the entries on Lines 2 and 3 have lost their base address. For reconstruction of program flow the first base address following the pointer must be used, in the example, Line 4. The pointer points to the oldest entry, Line 2. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 185 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) Field3 Bits in Compressed Pure PC Modes Table 6-41. Compressed Pure PC Mode Field 3 Information Bit Encoding INF1 0 0 1 1 INF0 0 1 0 1 TRACE BUFFER ROW CONTENT Base PC address TB[17:0] contains a full PC[17:0] value Trace Buffer[5:0] contain incremental PC relative to base address zero value Trace Buffer[11:0] contain next 2 incremental PCs relative to base address zero value Trace Buffer[17:0] contain next 3 incremental PCs relative to base address zero value Each time that PC[17:6] differs from the previous base PC[17:6], then a new base address is stored. The base address zero value is the lowest address in the 64 address range The first line of the trace buffer always gets a base PC address, this applies also on rollover. 6.4.5.5 Reading Data from Trace Buffer The data stored in the Trace Buffer can be read provided the DBG module is not armed, is configured for tracing (TSOURCE bit is set) and the system not secured. When the ARM bit is written to 1 the trace buffer is locked to prevent reading. The trace buffer can only be unlocked for reading by a single aligned word write to DBGTB when the module is disarmed. The Trace Buffer can only be read through the DBGTB register using aligned word reads, any byte or misaligned reads return 0 and do not cause the trace buffer pointer to increment to the next trace buffer address. The Trace Buffer data is read out first-in first-out. By reading CNT in DBGCNT the number of valid lines can be determined. DBGCNT does not decrement as data is read. Whilst reading an internal pointer is used to determine the next line to be read. After a tracing session, the pointer points to the oldest data entry, thus if no rollover has occurred, the pointer points to line0, otherwise it points to the line with the oldest entry. In compressed Pure PC mode on rollover the line with the oldest data entry may also contain newer data entries in fields 0 and 1. Thus if rollover is indicated by the TBF bit, the line status must be decoded using the INF bits in field3 of that line. If both INF bits are clear then the line contains only entries from before the last rollover. If INF0=1 then field 0 contains post rollover data but fields 1 and 2 contain pre rollover data. If INF1=1 then fields 0 and 1 contain post rollover data but field 2 contains pre rollover data. The pointer is initialized by each aligned write to DBGTBH to point to the oldest data again. This enables an interrupted trace buffer read sequence to be easily restarted from the oldest data entry. The least significant word of line is read out first. This corresponds to the fields 1 and 0 of Table 6-37. The next word read returns field 2 in the least significant bits [3:0] and “0” for bits [15:4]. Reading the Trace Buffer while the DBG module is armed returns invalid data and no shifting of the RAM pointer occurs. 6.4.5.6 Trace Buffer Reset State The Trace Buffer contents and DBGCNT bits are not initialized by a system reset. Thus should a system reset occur, the trace session information from immediately before the reset occurred can be read out and the number of valid lines in the trace buffer is indicated by DBGCNT. The internal pointer to the current S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 186 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) trace buffer address is initialized by unlocking the trace buffer and points to the oldest valid data even if a reset occurred during the tracing session. To read the trace buffer after a reset, TSOURCE must be set, otherwise the trace buffer reads as all zeroes. Generally debugging occurrences of system resets is best handled using end trigger alignment since the reset may occur before the trace trigger, which in the begin trigger alignment case means no information would be stored in the trace buffer. The Trace Buffer contents and DBGCNT bits are undefined following a POR. NOTE An external pin RESET that occurs simultaneous to a trace buffer entry can, in very seldom cases, lead to either that entry being corrupted or the first entry of the session being corrupted. In such cases the other contents of the trace buffer still contain valid tracing information. The case occurs when the reset assertion coincides with the trace buffer entry clock edge. 6.4.6 Tagging A tag follows program information as it advances through the instruction queue. When a tagged instruction reaches the head of the queue a tag hit occurs and can initiate a state sequencer transition. Each comparator control register features a TAG bit, which controls whether the comparator match causes a state sequencer transition immediately or tags the opcode at the matched address. If a comparator is enabled for tagged comparisons, the address stored in the comparator match address registers must be an opcode address. Using Begin trigger together with tagging, if the tagged instruction is about to be executed then the transition to the next state sequencer state occurs. If the transition is to the Final State, tracing is started. Only upon completion of the tracing session can a breakpoint be generated. Using End alignment, when the tagged instruction is about to be executed and the next transition is to Final State then a breakpoint is generated immediately, before the tagged instruction is carried out. R/W monitoring, access size (SZ) monitoring and data bus monitoring are not useful if tagging is selected, since the tag is attached to the opcode at the matched address and is not dependent on the data bus nor on the type of access. Thus these bits are ignored if tagging is selected. When configured for range comparisons and tagging, the ranges are accurate only to word boundaries. Tagging is disabled when the BDM becomes active. 6.4.7 Breakpoints It is possible to generate breakpoints from channel transitions to final state or using software to write to the TRIG bit in the DBGC1 register. 6.4.7.1 Breakpoints From Comparator Channels Breakpoints can be generated when the state sequencer transitions to the Final State. If configured for tagging, then the breakpoint is generated when the tagged opcode reaches the execution stage of the instruction queue. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 187 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) If a tracing session is selected by the TSOURCE bit, breakpoints are requested when the tracing session has completed, thus if Begin aligned triggering is selected, the breakpoint is requested only on completion of the subsequent trace (see Table 6-42). If no tracing session is selected, breakpoints are requested immediately. If the BRK bit is set, then the associated breakpoint is generated immediately independent of tracing trigger alignment. Table 6-42. Breakpoint Setup For CPU Breakpoints BRK 0 0 0 0 1 1 TALIGN 0 0 1 1 x x DBGBRK 0 1 0 1 1 0 Breakpoint Alignment Fill Trace Buffer until trigger then disarm (no breakpoints) Fill Trace Buffer until trigger, then breakpoint request occurs Start Trace Buffer at trigger (no breakpoints) Start Trace Buffer at trigger A breakpoint request occurs when Trace Buffer is full Terminate tracing and generate breakpoint immediately on trigger Terminate tracing immediately on trigger 6.4.7.2 Breakpoints Generated Via The TRIG Bit If a TRIG triggers occur, the Final State is entered whereby tracing trigger alignment is defined by the TALIGN bit. If a tracing session is selected by the TSOURCE bit, breakpoints are requested when the tracing session has completed, thus if Begin aligned triggering is selected, the breakpoint is requested only on completion of the subsequent trace (see Table 6-42). If no tracing session is selected, breakpoints are requested immediately. TRIG breakpoints are possible with a single write to DBGC1, setting ARM and TRIG simultaneously. 6.4.7.3 Breakpoint Priorities If a TRIG trigger occurs after Begin aligned tracing has already started, then the TRIG no longer has an effect. When the associated tracing session is complete, the breakpoint occurs. Similarly if a TRIG is followed by a subsequent comparator channel match, it has no effect, since tracing has already started. If a forced SWI breakpoint coincides with a BGND in user code with BDM enabled, then the BDM is activated by the BGND and the breakpoint to SWI is suppressed. 6.4.7.3.1 DBG Breakpoint Priorities And BDM Interfacing Breakpoint operation is dependent on the state of the BDM module. If the BDM module is active, the CPU is executing out of BDM firmware, thus comparator matches and associated breakpoints are disabled. In addition, while executing a BDM TRACE command, tagging into BDM is disabled. If BDM is not active, the breakpoint gives priority to BDM requests over SWI requests if the breakpoint happens to coincide with a SWI instruction in user code. On returning from BDM, the SWI from user code gets executed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 188 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) Table 6-43. Breakpoint Mapping Summary DBGBRK 0 1 X 1 1 BDM Bit (DBGC1[4]) X 0 X 1 1 BDM Enabled X X 1 0 1 BDM Active X 0 1 X 0 Breakpoint Mapping No Breakpoint Breakpoint to SWI No Breakpoint Breakpoint to SWI Breakpoint to BDM BDM cannot be entered from a breakpoint unless the ENABLE bit is set in the BDM. If entry to BDM via a BGND instruction is attempted and the ENABLE bit in the BDM is cleared, the CPU actually executes the BDM firmware code, checks the ENABLE and returns if ENABLE is not set. If not serviced by the monitor then the breakpoint is re-asserted when the BDM returns to normal CPU flow. If the comparator register contents coincide with the SWI/BDM vector address then an SWI in user code could coincide with a DBG breakpoint. The CPU ensures that BDM requests have a higher priority than SWI requests. Returning from the BDM/SWI service routine care must be taken to avoid a repeated breakpoint at the same address. Should a tagged or forced breakpoint coincide with a BGND in user code, then the instruction that follows the BGND instruction is the first instruction executed when normal program execution resumes. NOTE When program control returns from a tagged breakpoint using an RTI or BDM GO command without program counter modification it returns to the instruction whose tag generated the breakpoint. To avoid a repeated breakpoint at the same location reconfigure the DBG module in the SWI routine, if configured for an SWI breakpoint, or over the BDM interface by executing a TRACE command before the GO to increment the program flow past the tagged instruction. 6.5 6.5.1 Application Information State Machine scenarios Defining the state control registers as SCR1,SCR2, SCR3 and M0,M1,M2 as matches on channels 0,1,2 respectively. SCR encoding supported by S12SDBGV1 are shown in black. SCR encoding supported only in S12SDBGV2 are shown in red. For backwards compatibility the new scenarios use a 4th bit in each SCR register. Thus the existing encoding for SCRx[2:0] is not changed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 189 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) 6.5.2 Scenario 1 Figure 6-27. Scenario 1 A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 3 code events is executed. SCR1=0011 State1 M1 SCR2=0010 State2 M2 SCR3=0111 State3 M0 Final State Scenario 1 is possible with S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding 6.5.3 Scenario 2 Figure 6-28. Scenario 2a A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 2 code events is executed. SCR1=0011 State1 M1 SCR2=0101 State2 M2 Final State A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 2 code events is executed, whereby the first event is entry into a range (COMPA,COMPB configured for range mode). M1 is disabled in range modes. Figure 6-29. Scenario 2b SCR1=0111 State1 M01 SCR2=0101 State2 M2 Final State A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 2 code events is executed, whereby the second event is entry into a range (COMPA,COMPB configured for range mode) Figure 6-30. Scenario 2c SCR1=0010 State1 M2 SCR2=0011 State2 M0 Final State All 3 scenarios 2a,2b,2c are possible with the S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 190 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) 6.5.4 Scenario 3 Figure 6-31. Scenario 3 A trigger is generated immediately when one of up to 3 given events occurs SCR1=0000 State1 M012 Final State Scenario 3 is possible with S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding 6.5.5 Scenario 4 Trigger if a sequence of 2 events is carried out in an incorrect order. Event A must be followed by event B and event B must be followed by event A. 2 consecutive occurrences of event A without an intermediate event B cause a trigger. Similarly 2 consecutive occurrences of event B without an intermediate event A cause a trigger. This is possible by using CompA and CompC to match on the same address as shown. Figure 6-32. Scenario 4a SCR1=0100 State1 M1 M0 M2 M1 State2 M0 SCR2=0011 SCR3=0001 State 3 M1 Final State This scenario is currently not possible using 2 comparators only. S12SDBGV2 makes it possible with 2 comparators, State 3 allowing a M0 to return to state 2, whilst a M2 leads to final state as shown. Figure 6-33. Scenario 4b (with 2 comparators) SCR1=0110 State1 M2 M0 M0 M2 State2 M01 SCR2=1100 M1 disabled in range mode Final State SCR3=1110 State 3 M2 The advantage of using only 2 channels is that now range comparisons can be included (channel0) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 191 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) This however violates the S12SDBGV1 specification, which states that a match leading to final state always has priority in case of a simultaneous match, whilst priority is also given to the lowest channel number. For S12SDBG the corresponding CPU priority decoder is removed to support this, such that on simultaneous taghits, taghits pointing to final state have highest priority. If no taghit points to final state then the lowest channel number has priority. Thus with the above encoding from State3, the CPU and DBG would break on a simultaneous M0/M2. 6.5.6 Scenario 5 Figure 6-34. Scenario 5 Trigger if following event A, event C precedes event B. i.e. the expected execution flow is A->B->C. SCR1=0011 State1 M1 M2 SCR2=0110 State2 M0 Final State Scenario 5 is possible with the S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding 6.5.7 Scenario 6 Trigger if event A occurs twice in succession before any of 2 other events (BC) occurs. This scenario is not possible using the S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding. S12SDBGV2 includes additions shown in red. The change in SCR1 encoding also has the advantage that a State1->State3 transition using M0 is now possible. This is advantageous because range and data bus comparisons use channel0 only. Figure 6-35. Scenario 6 SCR1=1001 State1 M0 M12 SCR3=1010 State3 M0 Final State 6.5.8 Scenario 7 Trigger when a series of 3 events is executed out of order. Specifying the event order as M1,M2,M0 to run in loops (120120120). Any deviation from that order should trigger. This scenario is not possible using the S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 192 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding because OR possibilities are very limited in the channel encoding. By adding OR forks as shown in red this scenario is possible. Figure 6-36. Scenario 7 M01 SCR1=1101 State1 M1 SCR2=1100 State2 M2 SCR3=1101 State3 M12 Final State M0 M02 On simultaneous matches the lowest channel number has priority so with this configuration the forking from State1 has the peculiar effect that a simultaneous match0/match1 transitions to final state but a simultaneous match2/match1transitions to state2. 6.5.9 Scenario 8 Figure 6-37. Scenario 8a Trigger when a routine/event at M2 follows either M1 or M0. SCR1=0111 State1 M01 SCR2=0101 State2 M2 Final State Trigger when an event M2 is followed by either event M0 or event M1 Figure 6-38. Scenario 8b SCR1=0010 State1 M2 SCR2=0111 State2 M01 Final State Scenario 8a and 8b are possible with the S12SDBGV1 and S12SDBGV2 SCR encoding S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 193 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) 6.5.10 Scenario 9 Trigger when a routine/event at A (M2) does not follow either B or C (M1 or M0) before they are executed again. This cannot be realized with theS12SDBGV1 SCR encoding due to OR limitations. By changing the SCR2 encoding as shown in red this scenario becomes possible. Figure 6-39. Scenario 9 SCR1=0111 State1 M01 M2 SCR2=1111 State2 M01 Final State 6.5.11 Scenario 10 Trigger if an event M0 occurs following up to two successive M2 events without the resetting event M1. As shown up to 2 consecutive M2 events are allowed, whereby a reset to State1 is possible after either one or two M2 events. If an event M0 occurs following the second M2, before M1 resets to State1 then a trigger is generated. Configuring CompA and CompC the same, it is possible to generate a breakpoint on the third consecutive occurrence of event M0 without a reset M1. Figure 6-40. Scenario 10a M1 SCR1=0010 State1 M2 SCR2=0100 State2 M2 SCR3=0010 State3 M0 Final State M1 Figure 6-41. Scenario 10b M0 SCR1=0010 State1 M2 SCR2=0011 State2 M1 SCR3=0000 State3 Final State M0 Scenario 10b shows the case that after M2 then M1 must occur before M0. Starting from a particular point in code, event M2 must always be followed by M1 before M0. If after any M2, event M0 occurs before M1 then a trigger is generated. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 194 Freescale Semiconductor S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 195 S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 196 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 7 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) Revision History Version Revision Effective Number Date Date V01.00 V01.01 V01.02 V01.03 16 Jan.07 9 July 08 7 Oct. 08 16 Jan. 07 9 July 08 7 Oct. 08 Author Initial release Description of Changes added IRCLK to Block Diagram clarified and detailed oscillator filter functionality added note, that startup time of external oscillator tUPOSC must be considered, especially when entering Pseudo Stop Mode Modified reset phase descriptions to reference fVCORST instead of fPLLRST and correct typo of RESET pin sample point from 64 to 256 cycles in section: Description of Reset Operation Major rework fixing typos, figures and tables and improved description of Adaptive Oscillator Filter. 11 Dec. 08 11 Dec. 08 V01.04 17 Jun. 09 17 Jun. 09 V01.05 27 Apr. 10 27 Apr. 10 7.1 Introduction This specification describes the function of the Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU). • The Pierce oscillator (OSCLCP) provides a robust, low-noise and low-power external clock source. It is designed for optimal start-up margin with typical crystal oscillators. • The Voltage regulator (IVREG) operates from the range 3.13V to 5.5V. It provides all the required chip internal voltages and voltage monitors. • The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) provides a highly accurate frequency multiplier with internal filter. • The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) provides a1MHz clock. 7.1.1 Features The Pierce Oscillator (OSCLCP) contains circuitry to dynamically control current gain in the output amplitude. This ensures a signal with low harmonic distortion, low power and good noise immunity. • Supports crystals or resonators from 4MHz to 16MHz. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 197 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) • • • • • • High noise immunity due to input hysteresis and spike filtering. Low RF emissions with peak-to-peak swing limited dynamically Transconductance (gm) sized for optimum start-up margin for typical crystals Dynamic gain control eliminates the need for external current limiting resistor Integrated resistor eliminates the need for external bias resistor. Low power consumption: Operates from internal 1.8V (nominal) supply, Amplitude control limits power The Voltage Regulator (IVREG) has the following features: • Input voltage range from 3.13V to 5.5V • Low-voltage detect (LVD) with low-voltage interrupt (LVI) • Power-on reset (POR) • Low-voltage reset (LVR) The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) has the following features: • highly accurate and phase locked frequency multiplier • Configurable internal filter for best stability and lock time. • Frequency modulation for defined jitter and reduced emission • Automatic frequency lock detector • Interrupt request on entry or exit from locked condition • Reference clock either external (crystal) or internal square wave (1MHz IRC1M) based. • PLL stability is sufficient for LIN communication, even if using IRC1M as reference clock The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) has the following features: • Trimmable in frequency • Factory trimmed value for 1MHz in Flash Memory, can be overwritten by application if required Other features of the S12CPMU include • Clock monitor to detect loss of crystal • Autonomous periodical interrupt (API) • Bus Clock Generator — Clock switch to select either PLLCLK or external crystal/resonator based Bus Clock — PLLCLK divider to adjust system speed • System Reset generation from the following possible sources: — Power-on reset (POR) — Low-voltage reset (LVR) — Illegal address access — COP time out — Loss of oscillation (clock monitor fail) — External pin RESET S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 198 Freescale Semiconductor S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 7.1.2 Modes of Operation This subsection lists and briefly describes all operating modes supported by the S12CPMU. 7.1.2.1 Run Mode The voltage regulator is in Full Performance Mode (FPM). The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) is on. The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) is on. The API is available. • PLL Engaged Internal (PEI) — This is the default mode after System Reset and Power-On Reset. — The Bus Clock is based on the PLLCLK. — After reset the PLL is configured for 64MHz VCOCLK operation Post divider is 0x03, so PLLCLK is VCOCLK divided by 4, that is 16MHz and Bus Clock is 8MHz. The PLL can be re-configured for other bus frequencies. — The reference clock for the PLL (REFCLK) is based on internal reference clock IRC1M • PLL Engaged External (PEE) — The Bus Clock is based on the PLLCLK. — This mode can be entered from default mode PEI by performing the following steps: – Configure the PLL for desired bus frequency. – Program the reference divider (REFDIV[3:0] bits) to divide down oscillator frequency if necessary. – Enable the external oscillator (OSCE bit) • PLL Bypassed External (PBE) — The Bus Clock is based on the Oscillator Clock (OSCCLK). — This mode can be entered from default mode PEI by performing the following steps: – Enable the external oscillator (OSCE bit) – Wait for oscillator to start up (UPOSC=1) – Select the Oscillator Clock (OSCCLK) as Bus Clock (PLLSEL=0). — The PLLCLK is still on to filter possible spikes of the external oscillator clock. 7.1.2.2 Wait Mode For S12CPMU Wait Mode is the same as Run Mode. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 199 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 7.1.2.3 Stop Mode This mode is entered by executing the CPU STOP instruction. The voltage regulator is in Reduced Power Mode (RPM). The API is available. The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) is off. The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) is off. Core Clock, Bus Clock and BDM Clock are stopped. Depending on the setting of the PSTP and the OSCE bit, Stop Mode can be differentiated between Full Stop Mode (PSTP = 0 or OSCE=0) and Pseudo Stop Mode (PSTP = 1 and OSCE=1). • Full Stop Mode (PSTP=0 or OSCE=0) The external oscillator (OSCLCP) is disabled. After wake-up from Full Stop Mode the Core Clock and Bus Clock are running on PLLCLK (PLLSEL=1). After wake-up from Full Stop Mode COP and RTI are running on IRCCLK (COPOSCSEL=0, RTIOSCSEL=0). • Pseudo Stop Mode (PSTP=1 and OSCE=1) The external oscillator (OSCLCP) continues torun. If the respective enable bits are set the COP and RTI will continue to run. The clock configuration bits PLLSEL, COPOSCSEL, RTIOSCSEL are unchanged. NOTE When starting up the external oscillator (either by programming OSCE bit to 1 or on exit from Full Stop Mode with OSCE bit already 1) the software must wait for a minimum time equivalent to the startup-time of the external oscillator tUPOSC before entering Pseudo Stop Mode. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 200 Freescale Semiconductor S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 7.1.3 S12CPMU Block Diagram MMC Illegal Address Access VDD, VDDPLL, VDDF (core supplies) Low Voltage Detect VDDA Low Voltage Detect VDDX Voltage Regulator 3.13 to 5.5V Power-On Detect LVRF PORF Reset Generator UPOSC=0 sets PLLSEL bit COP time out VDDR VSSPLL VSS VDDX VSSX VDDA VSSA RESET Clock Monitor ILAF LVDS LVIE Low Voltage Interrupt S12CPMU Power-On Reset System Reset oscillator status Interrupt OSCIE monitor fail UPOSC adaptive spike filter Loop EXTAL Controlled Pierce Oscillator XTAL (OSCLCP) 4MHz-16MHz REFDIV[3:0] Reference Divider OSCCLK OSCFILT[4:0] & PLLSEL CAN_OSCCLK (to MSCAN) OSCBW IRCTRIM[9:0] Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) POSTDIV[4:0] Post Divider 1,2,..,32 divide by 4 ECLK2X (Core Clock) PLLCLK ECLK divide by 2 (Bus Clock) PSTP IRCCLK (to LCD) divide by 8 HTDS HTIE BDM Clock OSCE VCOFRQ[1:0] VCOCLK Lock detect REFCLK FBCLK Phase locked Loop with internal Filter (PLL) HT Interrupt REFFRQ[1:0] LOCK Divide by 2*(SYNDIV+1) SYNDIV[5:0] UPOSC UPOSC=0 clears IRCCLK COPCLK COP OSCCLK COP time out to Reset Generator IRCCLK High Temperature Sense LOCKIE Bus Clock RC Osc. ACLK PLL Lock Interrupt Autonomous API_EXTCLK Periodic Interrupt (API) APIE RTIE Real Time Interrupt (RTI) PRE CPMURTI API Interrupt RTI Interrupt APICLK Watchdog RTICLK OSCCLK COPOSCSEL PCE CPMUCOP RTIOSCSEL S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 201 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) Figure 7-1. Block diagram of S12CPMU Figure 7-2 shows a block diagram of the OSCLCP. OSCCLK Peak Detector Gain Control VDDPLL = 1.8 V VSSPLL Rf EXTAL XTAL Figure 7-2. OSCLCP Block Diagram 7.2 Signal Description This section lists and describes the signals that connect off chip. 7.2.1 RESET RESET is an active-low bidirectional pin. As an input it initializes the MCU asynchronously to a known start-up state. As an open-drain output it indicates that an MCU-internal reset has been triggered. 7.2.2 EXTAL and XTAL These pins provide the interface for a crystal to control the internal clock generator circuitry. EXTAL is the external clock input or the input to the crystal oscillator amplifier. XTAL is the output of the crystal oscillator amplifier. The MCU internal OSCCLK is derived from the EXTAL input frequency. If OSCE=0, S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 202 Freescale Semiconductor S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) the EXTAL pin is pulled down by an internal resistor of approximately 200 kΩ and the XTAL pin is pulled down by an internal resistor of approximately 700 kΩ. NOTE Freescale recommends an evaluation of the application board and chosen resonator or crystal by the resonator or crystal supplier. Loop controlled circuit is not suited for overtone resonators and crystals. 7.2.3 TEMPSENSE — temperature sensor output voltage Depending on the VSEL value either the voltage level generated by the temperature sensor or the VREG bandgap voltage is driven to a special channel of the ATD Converter. See device level specification for connectivity. 7.2.4 VDDR — Regulator Power Input Pin VDDR is the power input of IVREG. All currents sourced into the regulator loads flow through this pin. A chip external decoupling capacitor (100 nF...220 nF, X7R ceramic) between VDDR and VSS can smooth ripple on VDDR. 7.2.5 VDDA, VSSA — Regulator Reference Supply Pins VDDA/VSSA, which are relatively quiet, are used to supply the analog parts of the regulator. Internal precision reference circuits are supplied from these signals. A chip external decoupling capacitor (100 nF...220 nF, X7R ceramic) between VDDA and VSSA can further improve the quality of this supply. 7.2.6 VSS, VSSPLL— Ground Pins VSS and VSSPLL must be grounded. 7.2.7 VDDX, VSSX— Pad Supply Pins This supply domain is monitored by the Low Voltage Reset circuit. An off-chip decoupling capacitor (100 nF...220 nF, X7R ceramic) between VDDX and VSSX can further improve the quality of this supply. 7.2.8 API_EXTCLK — API external clock output pin This pin provides the signal selected via APIES and is enabled with APIEA bit. See device specification to which pin it connects. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 203 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 7.3 Memory Map and Registers This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the S12CPMU. 7.3.1 Module Memory Map The S12CPMU registers are shown in Figure 7-3. Addres s 0x0034 0x0035 0x0036 0x0037 0x0038 Name CPMU SYNR CPMU REFDIV CPMU POSTDIV CPMUFLG CPMUINT R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0 VCOFRQ[1:0] REFFRQ[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 SYNDIV[5:0] REFDIV[3:0] POSTDIV[4:0] LOCKIF LOCKIE 0 LOCK 0 ILAF 0 OSCIF OSCIE RTI OSCSEL 0 UPOSC 0 RTIF RTIE PLLSEL 0 PORF 0 LVRF 0 0 0x0039 CPMUCLKS 0x003A 0x003B CPMUPLL CPMURTI PSTP 0 PRE 0 PCE 0 COP OSCSEL 0 FM1 RTR5 0 WRTMASK 0 0 0 Bit 5 VSEL 0 0 FM0 RTR4 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 RTDEC WCOP 0 0 0 Bit 7 0 0 RTR6 RSBCK 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 0 RTR3 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 HTE 0 RTR2 CR2 0 0 0 Bit 2 HTDS LVDS RTR1 CR1 0 0 0 Bit 1 HTIE LVIE APIE RTR0 CR0 0 0 0 Bit 0 HTIF LVIF APIF 0x003C CPMUCOP 0x003D 0x003E 0x003F 0x02F0 0x02F1 0x02F2 RESERVED R CPMUTEST0 W RESERVED R CPMUTEST1 W CPMU ARMCOP CPMU HTCTL CPMU LVCTL CPMU APICTL R W R W R W R W APICLK APIES APIEA APIFE = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 7-3. CPMU Register Summary S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 204 Freescale Semiconductor S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) Addres s Name R W R W R W Bit 7 APITR5 APIR15 APIR7 0 6 APITR4 APIR14 APIR6 0 0 5 APITR3 APIR13 APIR5 0 0 4 APITR2 APIR12 APIR4 0 0 3 APITR1 APIR11 APIR3 0 2 APITR0 APIR10 APIR2 0 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x02F3 CPMUAPITR 0x02F4 CPMUAPIRH 0x02F5 CPMUAPIRL 0x02F6 APIR9 APIR1 0 APIR8 APIR0 0 RESERVED R CPMUTEST3 W R W R W R W R W R W 0x02F7 CPMUHTTR 0x02F8 0x02F9 0x02FA CPMU IRCTRIMH CPMU IRCTRIML CPMUOSC HTOE HTTR3 0 HTTR2 0 HTTR1 HTTR0 TCTRIM[3:0] IRCTRIM[9:8] IRCTRIM[7:0] OSCE 0 0 OSCBW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OSCFILT[4:0] 0 0 0 0 PROT 0 0x02FB CPMUPROT 0x02FC RESERVED R CPMUTEST2 W = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 7-3. CPMU Register Summary S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 205 S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU) 7.3.2 Register Descriptions This section describes all the S12CPMU registers and their individual bits. Address order is as listed in Figure 7-3. 7.3.2.1 S12CPMU Synthesizer Register (CPMUSYNR) The CPMUSYNR register controls the multiplication factor of the PLL and selects the VCO frequency range. 0x0034 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R VCOFRQ[1:0] W Reset 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 SYNDIV[5:0] Figure 7-4. S12CPMU Synthesizer Register (CPMUSYNR) Read: Anytime Write: If PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register) and PLLSEL=1 (CPMUCLKS register), then write anytime. Else write has no effect. NOTE Writing to this register clears the LOCK and UPOSC status bits. If PLL has locked (LOCK=1) f VCO = 2 × f REF × ( SYNDIV + 1 ) NOTE fVCO must be within the specified VCO frequency lock range. Bus frequency fbus must not exceed the specified maximum. The VCOFRQ[1:0] bits are used to configure the VCO gain for optimal stability and lock time. For correct PLL operation the VCOFRQ[1:0] bits have to be selected according to the actual target VCOCLK frequency as shown in Table 7-1. Setting the VCOFRQ[1:0] bits incorrectly can result in a non functional PLL (no locking and/or insufficient stability). Table 7-1. VCO Clock Frequency Selection VCOCLK Frequency Ranges 32MHz 0x0000 >0x0000 0x0000(1) (indicates no period) 0x00001 (indicates no period) XX XX PPOLx 1 0 1 0 1 0 PWMx Output Always Low Always High Always High Always Low Always High Always Low 1. Counter = 0x0000 and does not count. 10.5 Resets The reset state of each individual bit is listed within the register description section (see Section 10.3, “Memory Map and Register Definition,” which details the registers and their bit-fields. All special functions or modes which are initialized during or just following reset are described within this section. • The 8-bit up/down counter is configured as an up counter out of reset. • All the channels are disabled and all the counters don’t count. 10.6 Interrupts The PWM8B6CV1 module has only one interrupt which is generated at the time of emergency shutdown, if the corresponding enable bit (PWMIE) is set. This bit is the enable for the interrupt. The interrupt flag PWMIF is set whenever the input level of the PWM5 channel changes while PWM5ENA=1 or when PWMENA is being asserted while the level at PWM5 is active. A description of the registers involved and affected due to this interrupt is explained in Section 10.3.2.15, “PWM Shutdown Register (PWMSDN).” S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 362 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 11 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Table 11-1. Revision History Version Number 05.01 05.02 05.03 05.04 Revision Date 04/16/2004 10/14/2005 12/25/2008 08/05/2009 Effective Date Author Description of Changes Update OR and PF flag description; Correct baud rate tolerance in 4.7.5.1 and 4.7.5.2; Clean up classification and NDA message banners Correct alternative registers address; Remove unavailable baud rate in Table1-16 remove redundancy comments in Figure1-2 fix typo, SCIBDL reset value be 0x04, not 0x00 11.1 Introduction This block guide provides an overview of the serial communication interface (SCI) module. The SCI allows asynchronous serial communications with peripheral devices and other CPUs. 11.1.1 Glossary IR: InfraRed IrDA: Infrared Design Associate IRQ: Interrupt Request LIN: Local Interconnect Network LSB: Least Significant Bit MSB: Most Significant Bit NRZ: Non-Return-to-Zero RZI: Return-to-Zero-Inverted RXD: Receive Pin SCI : Serial Communication Interface TXD: Transmit Pin S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 363 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.1.2 Features The SCI includes these distinctive features: • Full-duplex or single-wire operation • Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format • Selectable IrDA 1.4 return-to-zero-inverted (RZI) format with programmable pulse widths • 13-bit baud rate selection • Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit data format • Separately enabled transmitter and receiver • Programmable polarity for transmitter and receiver • Programmable transmitter output parity • Two receiver wakeup methods: — Idle line wakeup — Address mark wakeup • Interrupt-driven operation with eight flags: — Transmitter empty — Transmission complete — Receiver full — Idle receiver input — Receiver overrun — Noise error — Framing error — Parity error — Receive wakeup on active edge — Transmit collision detect supporting LIN — Break Detect supporting LIN • Receiver framing error detection • Hardware parity checking • 1/16 bit-time noise detection 11.1.3 Modes of Operation The SCI functions the same in normal, special, and emulation modes. It has two low power modes, wait and stop modes. • Run mode • Wait mode • Stop mode S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 364 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.1.4 Block Diagram Figure 11-1 is a high level block diagram of the SCI module, showing the interaction of various function blocks. SCI Data Register RXD Data In Infrared Decoder Receive Shift Register IDLE Receive RDRF/OR Interrupt Generation BRKD RXEDG BERR Transmit TDRE Interrupt Generation TC Receive & Wakeup Control SCI Interrupt Request Bus Clock Baud Rate Generator Data Format Control 1/16 Transmit Control Transmit Shift Register Infrared Encoder Data Out TXD SCI Data Register Figure 11-1. SCI Block Diagram 11.2 External Signal Description The SCI module has a total of two external pins. 11.2.1 TXD — Transmit Pin The TXD pin transmits SCI (standard or infrared) data. It will idle high in either mode and is high impedance anytime the transmitter is disabled. 11.2.2 RXD — Receive Pin The RXD pin receives SCI (standard or infrared) data. An idle line is detected as a line high. This input is ignored when the receiver is disabled and should be terminated to a known voltage. 11.3 Memory Map and Register Definition This section provides a detailed description of all the SCI registers. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 365 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.3.1 Module Memory Map and Register Definition The memory map for the SCI module is given below in Figure 11-2. The address listed for each register is the address offset. The total address for each register is the sum of the base address for the SCI module and the address offset for each register. 11.3.2 Register Descriptions This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register diagram with an associated figure number. Writes to a reserved register locations do not have any effect and reads of these locations return a zero. Details of register bit and field function follow the register diagrams, in bit order. Register Name 0x0000 SCIBDH1 0x0001 SCIBDL1 0x0002 SCICR11 0x0000 SCIASR12 0x0001 SCIACR12 0x0002 SCIACR22 0x0003 SCICR2 0x0004 SCISR1 0x0005 SCISR2 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W AMAP 0 0 TXPOL RXPOL BRK13 TXDIR RAF TIE TDRE TCIE TC RIE RDRF ILIE IDLE TE OR Bit 7 IREN 6 TNP1 5 TNP0 4 SBR12 3 SBR11 2 SBR10 1 SBR9 Bit 0 SBR8 SBR7 SBR6 SBR5 SBR4 SBR3 SBR2 SBR1 SBR0 LOOPS SCISWAI 0 RSRC 0 M 0 WAKE 0 ILT PE PT RXEDGIF BERRV 0 BERRIF BKDIF RXEDGIE 0 0 0 0 0 BERRIE BKDIE 0 0 0 0 BERRM1 BERRM0 BKDFE RE NF RWU FE SBK PF = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-2. SCI Register Summary (Sheet 1 of 2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 366 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Register Name 0x0006 SCIDRH 0x0007 SCIDRL R W R W Bit 7 R8 6 T8 R6 T6 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 Bit 0 0 R7 T7 R5 T5 R4 T4 R3 T3 R2 T2 R1 T1 R0 T0 1.These registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCISR2 register is set to zero. 2,These registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCISR2 register is set to one. = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-2. SCI Register Summary (Sheet 2 of 2) 11.3.2.1 SCI Baud Rate Registers (SCIBDH, SCIBDL) Module Base + 0x0000 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset IREN 0 TNP1 0 TNP0 0 SBR12 0 SBR11 0 SBR10 0 SBR9 0 SBR8 0 Figure 11-3. SCI Baud Rate Register (SCIBDH) Module Base + 0x0001 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset SBR7 0 SBR6 0 SBR5 0 SBR4 0 SBR3 0 SBR2 1 SBR1 0 SBR0 0 Figure 11-4. SCI Baud Rate Register (SCIBDL) Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 0. If only SCIBDH is written to, a read will not return the correct data until SCIBDL is written to as well, following a write to SCIBDH. Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 0. NOTE Those two registers are only visible in the memory map if AMAP = 0 (reset condition). The SCI baud rate register is used by to determine the baud rate of the SCI, and to control the infrared modulation/demodulation submodule. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 367 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Table 11-2. SCIBDH and SCIBDL Field Descriptions Field 7 IREN 6:5 TNP[1:0] 4:0 7:0 SBR[12:0] Description Infrared Enable Bit — This bit enables/disables the infrared modulation/demodulation submodule. 0 IR disabled 1 IR enabled Transmitter Narrow Pulse Bits — These bits enable whether the SCI transmits a 1/16, 3/16, 1/32 or 1/4 narrow pulse. See Table 11-3. SCI Baud Rate Bits — The baud rate for the SCI is determined by the bits in this register. The baud rate is calculated two different ways depending on the state of the IREN bit. The formulas for calculating the baud rate are: When IREN = 0 then, SCI baud rate = SCI bus clock / (16 x SBR[12:0]) When IREN = 1 then, SCI baud rate = SCI bus clock / (32 x SBR[12:1]) Note: The baud rate generator is disabled after reset and not started until the TE bit or the RE bit is set for the first time. The baud rate generator is disabled when (SBR[12:0] = 0 and IREN = 0) or (SBR[12:1] = 0 and IREN = 1). Note: Writing to SCIBDH has no effect without writing to SCIBDL, because writing to SCIBDH puts the data in a temporary location until SCIBDL is written to. Table 11-3. IRSCI Transmit Pulse Width TNP[1:0] 11 10 01 00 Narrow Pulse Width 1/4 1/32 1/16 3/16 11.3.2.2 SCI Control Register 1 (SCICR1) Module Base + 0x0002 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset LOOPS 0 SCISWAI 0 RSRC 0 M 0 WAKE 0 ILT 0 PE 0 PT 0 Figure 11-5. SCI Control Register 1 (SCICR1) Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 0. Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 0. NOTE This register is only visible in the memory map if AMAP = 0 (reset condition). S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 368 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Table 11-4. SCICR1 Field Descriptions Field 7 LOOPS Description Loop Select Bit — LOOPS enables loop operation. In loop operation, the RXD pin is disconnected from the SCI and the transmitter output is internally connected to the receiver input. Both the transmitter and the receiver must be enabled to use the loop function. 0 Normal operation enabled 1 Loop operation enabled The receiver input is determined by the RSRC bit. SCI Stop in Wait Mode Bit — SCISWAI disables the SCI in wait mode. 0 SCI enabled in wait mode 1 SCI disabled in wait mode Receiver Source Bit — When LOOPS = 1, the RSRC bit determines the source for the receiver shift register input. See Table 11-5. 0 Receiver input internally connected to transmitter output 1 Receiver input connected externally to transmitter Data Format Mode Bit — MODE determines whether data characters are eight or nine bits long. 0 One start bit, eight data bits, one stop bit 1 One start bit, nine data bits, one stop bit Wakeup Condition Bit — WAKE determines which condition wakes up the SCI: a logic 1 (address mark) in the most significant bit position of a received data character or an idle condition on the RXD pin. 0 Idle line wakeup 1 Address mark wakeup Idle Line Type Bit — ILT determines when the receiver starts counting logic 1s as idle character bits. The counting begins either after the start bit or after the stop bit. If the count begins after the start bit, then a string of logic 1s preceding the stop bit may cause false recognition of an idle character. Beginning the count after the stop bit avoids false idle character recognition, but requires properly synchronized transmissions. 0 Idle character bit count begins after start bit 1 Idle character bit count begins after stop bit Parity Enable Bit — PE enables the parity function. When enabled, the parity function inserts a parity bit in the most significant bit position. 0 Parity function disabled 1 Parity function enabled Parity Type Bit — PT determines whether the SCI generates and checks for even parity or odd parity. With even parity, an even number of 1s clears the parity bit and an odd number of 1s sets the parity bit. With odd parity, an odd number of 1s clears the parity bit and an even number of 1s sets the parity bit. 1 Even parity 1 Odd parity 6 SCISWAI 5 RSRC 4 M 3 WAKE 2 ILT 1 PE 0 PT Table 11-5. Loop Functions LOOPS 0 1 1 RSRC x 0 1 Normal operation Loop mode with transmitter output internally connected to receiver input Single-wire mode with TXD pin connected to receiver input Function S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 369 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.3.2.3 SCI Alternative Status Register 1 (SCIASR1) Module Base + 0x0000 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset RXEDGIF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BERRV 0 BERRIF 0 BKDIF 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-6. SCI Alternative Status Register 1 (SCIASR1) Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 1 Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 1 Table 11-6. SCIASR1 Field Descriptions Field 7 RXEDGIF Description Receive Input Active Edge Interrupt Flag — RXEDGIF is asserted, if an active edge (falling if RXPOL = 0, rising if RXPOL = 1) on the RXD input occurs. RXEDGIF bit is cleared by writing a “1” to it. 0 No active receive on the receive input has occurred 1 An active edge on the receive input has occurred Bit Error Value — BERRV reflects the state of the RXD input when the bit error detect circuitry is enabled and a mismatch to the expected value happened. The value is only meaningful, if BERRIF = 1. 0 A low input was sampled, when a high was expected 1 A high input reassembled, when a low was expected Bit Error Interrupt Flag — BERRIF is asserted, when the bit error detect circuitry is enabled and if the value sampled at the RXD input does not match the transmitted value. If the BERRIE interrupt enable bit is set an interrupt will be generated. The BERRIF bit is cleared by writing a “1” to it. 0 No mismatch detected 1 A mismatch has occurred Break Detect Interrupt Flag — BKDIF is asserted, if the break detect circuitry is enabled and a break signal is received. If the BKDIE interrupt enable bit is set an interrupt will be generated. The BKDIF bit is cleared by writing a “1” to it. 0 No break signal was received 1 A break signal was received 2 BERRV 1 BERRIF 0 BKDIF 11.3.2.4 SCI Alternative Control Register 1 (SCIACR1) Module Base + 0x0001 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset RXEDGIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BERRIE 0 BKDIE 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-7. SCI Alternative Control Register 1 (SCIACR1) Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 1 Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 1 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 370 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Table 11-7. SCIACR1 Field Descriptions Field 7 RSEDGIE Description Receive Input Active Edge Interrupt Enable — RXEDGIE enables the receive input active edge interrupt flag, RXEDGIF, to generate interrupt requests. 0 RXEDGIF interrupt requests disabled 1 RXEDGIF interrupt requests enabled Bit Error Interrupt Enable — BERRIE enables the bit error interrupt flag, BERRIF, to generate interrupt requests. 0 BERRIF interrupt requests disabled 1 BERRIF interrupt requests enabled Break Detect Interrupt Enable — BKDIE enables the break detect interrupt flag, BKDIF, to generate interrupt requests. 0 BKDIF interrupt requests disabled 1 BKDIF interrupt requests enabled 1 BERRIE 0 BKDIE 11.3.2.5 SCI Alternative Control Register 2 (SCIACR2) Module Base + 0x0002 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BERRM1 0 BERRM0 0 BKDFE 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-8. SCI Alternative Control Register 2 (SCIACR2) Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 1 Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 1 Table 11-8. SCIACR2 Field Descriptions Field Description 2:1 Bit Error Mode — Those two bits determines the functionality of the bit error detect feature. See Table 11-9. BERRM[1:0] 0 BKDFE Break Detect Feature Enable — BKDFE enables the break detect circuitry. 0 Break detect circuit disabled 1 Break detect circuit enabled Table 11-9. Bit Error Mode Coding BERRM1 0 0 1 1 BERRM0 0 1 0 1 Bit error detect circuit is disabled Receive input sampling occurs during the 9th time tick of a transmitted bit (refer to Figure 11-19) Receive input sampling occurs during the 13th time tick of a transmitted bit (refer to Figure 11-19) Reserved Function S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 371 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.3.2.6 SCI Control Register 2 (SCICR2) Module Base + 0x0003 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset TIE 0 TCIE 0 RIE 0 ILIE 0 TE 0 RE 0 RWU 0 SBK 0 Figure 11-9. SCI Control Register 2 (SCICR2) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 11-10. SCICR2 Field Descriptions Field 7 TIE Description Transmitter Interrupt Enable Bit — TIE enables the transmit data register empty flag, TDRE, to generate interrupt requests. 0 TDRE interrupt requests disabled 1 TDRE interrupt requests enabled Transmission Complete Interrupt Enable Bit — TCIE enables the transmission complete flag, TC, to generate interrupt requests. 0 TC interrupt requests disabled 1 TC interrupt requests enabled Receiver Full Interrupt Enable Bit — RIE enables the receive data register full flag, RDRF, or the overrun flag, OR, to generate interrupt requests. 0 RDRF and OR interrupt requests disabled 1 RDRF and OR interrupt requests enabled Idle Line Interrupt Enable Bit — ILIE enables the idle line flag, IDLE, to generate interrupt requests. 0 IDLE interrupt requests disabled 1 IDLE interrupt requests enabled Transmitter Enable Bit — TE enables the SCI transmitter and configures the TXD pin as being controlled by the SCI. The TE bit can be used to queue an idle preamble. 0 Transmitter disabled 1 Transmitter enabled Receiver Enable Bit — RE enables the SCI receiver. 0 Receiver disabled 1 Receiver enabled Receiver Wakeup Bit — Standby state 0 Normal operation. 1 RWU enables the wakeup function and inhibits further receiver interrupt requests. Normally, hardware wakes the receiver by automatically clearing RWU. Send Break Bit — Toggling SBK sends one break character (10 or 11 logic 0s, respectively 13 or 14 logics 0s if BRK13 is set). Toggling implies clearing the SBK bit before the break character has finished transmitting. As long as SBK is set, the transmitter continues to send complete break characters (10 or 11 bits, respectively 13 or 14 bits). 0 No break characters 1 Transmit break characters 6 TCIE 5 RIE 4 ILIE 3 TE 2 RE 1 RWU 0 SBK S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 372 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.3.2.7 SCI Status Register 1 (SCISR1) The SCISR1 and SCISR2 registers provides inputs to the MCU for generation of SCI interrupts. Also, these registers can be polled by the MCU to check the status of these bits. The flag-clearing procedures require that the status register be read followed by a read or write to the SCI data register.It is permissible to execute other instructions between the two steps as long as it does not compromise the handling of I/O, but the order of operations is important for flag clearing. Module Base + 0x0004 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset TDRE 1 TC 1 RDRF 0 IDLE 0 OR 0 NF 0 FE 0 PF 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-10. SCI Status Register 1 (SCISR1) Read: Anytime Write: Has no meaning or effect Table 11-11. SCISR1 Field Descriptions Field 7 TDRE Description Transmit Data Register Empty Flag — TDRE is set when the transmit shift register receives a byte from the SCI data register. When TDRE is 1, the transmit data register (SCIDRH/L) is empty and can receive a new value to transmit.Clear TDRE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1), with TDRE set and then writing to SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 No byte transferred to transmit shift register 1 Byte transferred to transmit shift register; transmit data register empty Transmit Complete Flag — TC is set low when there is a transmission in progress or when a preamble or break character is loaded. TC is set high when the TDRE flag is set and no data, preamble, or break character is being transmitted.When TC is set, the TXD pin becomes idle (logic 1). Clear TC by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with TC set and then writing to SCI data register low (SCIDRL). TC is cleared automatically when data, preamble, or break is queued and ready to be sent. TC is cleared in the event of a simultaneous set and clear of the TC flag (transmission not complete). 0 Transmission in progress 1 No transmission in progress Receive Data Register Full Flag — RDRF is set when the data in the receive shift register transfers to the SCI data register. Clear RDRF by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with RDRF set and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 Data not available in SCI data register 1 Received data available in SCI data register Idle Line Flag — IDLE is set when 10 consecutive logic 1s (if M = 0) or 11 consecutive logic 1s (if M =1) appear on the receiver input. Once the IDLE flag is cleared, a valid frame must again set the RDRF flag before an idle condition can set the IDLE flag.Clear IDLE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with IDLE set and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 Receiver input is either active now or has never become active since the IDLE flag was last cleared 1 Receiver input has become idle Note: When the receiver wakeup bit (RWU) is set, an idle line condition does not set the IDLE flag. 6 TC 5 RDRF 4 IDLE S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 373 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Table 11-11. SCISR1 Field Descriptions (continued) Field 3 OR Description Overrun Flag — OR is set when software fails to read the SCI data register before the receive shift register receives the next frame. The OR bit is set immediately after the stop bit has been completely received for the second frame. The data in the shift register is lost, but the data already in the SCI data registers is not affected. Clear OR by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with OR set and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 No overrun 1 Overrun Note: OR flag may read back as set when RDRF flag is clear. This may happen if the following sequence of events occurs: 1. After the first frame is received, read status register SCISR1 (returns RDRF set and OR flag clear); 2. Receive second frame without reading the first frame in the data register (the second frame is not received and OR flag is set); 3. Read data register SCIDRL (returns first frame and clears RDRF flag in the status register); 4. Read status register SCISR1 (returns RDRF clear and OR set). Event 3 may be at exactly the same time as event 2 or any time after. When this happens, a dummy SCIDRL read following event 4 will be required to clear the OR flag if further frames are to be received. Noise Flag — NF is set when the SCI detects noise on the receiver input. NF bit is set during the same cycle as the RDRF flag but does not get set in the case of an overrun. Clear NF by reading SCI status register 1(SCISR1), and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 No noise 1 Noise Framing Error Flag — FE is set when a logic 0 is accepted as the stop bit. FE bit is set during the same cycle as the RDRF flag but does not get set in the case of an overrun. FE inhibits further data reception until it is cleared. Clear FE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with FE set and then reading the SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 No framing error 1 Framing error Parity Error Flag — PF is set when the parity enable bit (PE) is set and the parity of the received data does not match the parity type bit (PT). PF bit is set during the same cycle as the RDRF flag but does not get set in the case of an overrun. Clear PF by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1), and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 0 No parity error 1 Parity error 2 NF 1 FE 0 PF 11.3.2.8 SCI Status Register 2 (SCISR2) Module Base + 0x0005 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset AMAP 0 0 0 0 0 TXPOL 0 RXPOL 0 BRK13 0 TXDIR 0 RAF 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-11. SCI Status Register 2 (SCISR2) Read: Anytime S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 374 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Write: Anytime Table 11-12. SCISR2 Field Descriptions Field 7 AMAP Description Alternative Map — This bit controls which registers sharing the same address space are accessible. In the reset condition the SCI behaves as previous versions. Setting AMAP=1 allows the access to another set of control and status registers and hides the baud rate and SCI control Register 1. 0 The registers labelled SCIBDH (0x0000),SCIBDL (0x0001), SCICR1 (0x0002) are accessible 1 The registers labelled SCIASR1 (0x0000),SCIACR1 (0x0001), SCIACR2 (0x00002) are accessible Transmit Polarity — This bit control the polarity of the transmitted data. In NRZ format, a one is represented by a mark and a zero is represented by a space for normal polarity, and the opposite for inverted polarity. In IrDA format, a zero is represented by short high pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle low for a one for normal polarity, and a zero is represented by short low pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle high for a one for inverted polarity. 0 Normal polarity 1 Inverted polarity Receive Polarity — This bit control the polarity of the received data. In NRZ format, a one is represented by a mark and a zero is represented by a space for normal polarity, and the opposite for inverted polarity. In IrDA format, a zero is represented by short high pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle low for a one for normal polarity, and a zero is represented by short low pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle high for a one for inverted polarity. 0 Normal polarity 1 Inverted polarity Break Transmit Character Length — This bit determines whether the transmit break character is 10 or 11 bit respectively 13 or 14 bits long. The detection of a framing error is not affected by this bit. 0 Break character is 10 or 11 bit long 1 Break character is 13 or 14 bit long Transmitter Pin Data Direction in Single-Wire Mode — This bit determines whether the TXD pin is going to be used as an input or output, in the single-wire mode of operation. This bit is only relevant in the single-wire mode of operation. 0 TXD pin to be used as an input in single-wire mode 1 TXD pin to be used as an output in single-wire mode Receiver Active Flag — RAF is set when the receiver detects a logic 0 during the RT1 time period of the start bit search. RAF is cleared when the receiver detects an idle character. 0 No reception in progress 1 Reception in progress 4 TXPOL 3 RXPOL 2 BRK13 1 TXDIR 0 RAF 11.3.2.9 SCI Data Registers (SCIDRH, SCIDRL) Module Base + 0x0006 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset R8 0 T8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 11-12. SCI Data Registers (SCIDRH) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 375 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Module Base + 0x0007 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset R7 T7 0 R6 T6 0 R5 T5 0 R4 T4 0 R3 T3 0 R2 T2 0 R1 T1 0 R0 T0 0 Figure 11-13. SCI Data Registers (SCIDRL) Read: Anytime; reading accesses SCI receive data register Write: Anytime; writing accesses SCI transmit data register; writing to R8 has no effect Table 11-13. SCIDRH and SCIDRL Field Descriptions Field SCIDRH 7 R8 SCIDRH 6 T8 SCIDRL 7:0 R[7:0] T[7:0] Description Received Bit 8 — R8 is the ninth data bit received when the SCI is configured for 9-bit data format (M = 1). Transmit Bit 8 — T8 is the ninth data bit transmitted when the SCI is configured for 9-bit data format (M = 1). R7:R0 — Received bits seven through zero for 9-bit or 8-bit data formats T7:T0 — Transmit bits seven through zero for 9-bit or 8-bit formats NOTE If the value of T8 is the same as in the previous transmission, T8 does not have to be rewritten.The same value is transmitted until T8 is rewritten In 8-bit data format, only SCI data register low (SCIDRL) needs to be accessed. When transmitting in 9-bit data format and using 8-bit write instructions, write first to SCI data register high (SCIDRH), then SCIDRL. 11.4 Functional Description This section provides a complete functional description of the SCI block, detailing the operation of the design from the end user perspective in a number of subsections. Figure 11-14 shows the structure of the SCI module. The SCI allows full duplex, asynchronous, serial communication between the CPU and remote devices, including other CPUs. The SCI transmitter and receiver operate independently, although they use the same baud rate generator. The CPU monitors the status of the SCI, writes the data to be transmitted, and processes received data. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 376 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) IREN SCI Data Register RXD Infrared Receive Decoder Ir_RXD SCRXD Receive Shift Register RE R16XCLK Receive and Wakeup Control RWU LOOPS RSRC M Baud Rate Generator WAKE Data Format Control ILT PE SBR12:SBR0 PT R8 NF FE PF RAF IDLE RDRF OR RIE TIE TDRE SCI Interrupt Request RDRF/OR TC RXEDGIE Active Edge Detect Break Detect BKDIE RXEDGIF BKDIF RXD BERRIE Infrared Transmit Encoder R32XCLK TNP[1:0] IREN BERRM[1:0] Ir_TXD TXD ILIE IDLE Bus Clock TDRE TC TCIE TE ÷16 Transmit Control LOOPS SBK RSRC T8 Transmit Shift Register SCI Data Register BKDFE SCTXD R16XCLK LIN Transmit BERRIF Collision Detect Figure 11-14. Detailed SCI Block Diagram 11.4.1 Infrared Interface Submodule This module provides the capability of transmitting narrow pulses to an IR LED and receiving narrow pulses and transforming them to serial bits, which are sent to the SCI. The IrDA physical layer specification defines a half-duplex infrared communication link for exchange data. The full standard includes data rates up to 16 Mbits/s. This design covers only data rates between 2.4 Kbits/s and 115.2 Kbits/s. The infrared submodule consists of two major blocks: the transmit encoder and the receive decoder. The SCI transmits serial bits of data which are encoded by the infrared submodule to transmit a narrow pulse S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 377 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) for every zero bit. No pulse is transmitted for every one bit. When receiving data, the IR pulses should be detected using an IR photo diode and transformed to CMOS levels by the IR receive decoder (external from the MCU). The narrow pulses are then stretched by the infrared submodule to get back to a serial bit stream to be received by the SCI.The polarity of transmitted pulses and expected receive pulses can be inverted so that a direct connection can be made to external IrDA transceiver modules that uses active low pulses. The infrared submodule receives its clock sources from the SCI. One of these two clocks are selected in the infrared submodule in order to generate either 3/16, 1/16, 1/32 or 1/4 narrow pulses during transmission. The infrared block receives two clock sources from the SCI, R16XCLK and R32XCLK, which are configured to generate the narrow pulse width during transmission. The R16XCLK and R32XCLK are internal clocks with frequencies 16 and 32 times the baud rate respectively. Both R16XCLK and R32XCLK clocks are used for transmitting data. The receive decoder uses only the R16XCLK clock. 11.4.1.1 Infrared Transmit Encoder The infrared transmit encoder converts serial bits of data from transmit shift register to the TXD pin. A narrow pulse is transmitted for a zero bit and no pulse for a one bit. The narrow pulse is sent in the middle of the bit with a duration of 1/32, 1/16, 3/16 or 1/4 of a bit time. A narrow high pulse is transmitted for a zero bit when TXPOL is cleared, while a narrow low pulse is transmitted for a zero bit when TXPOL is set. 11.4.1.2 Infrared Receive Decoder The infrared receive block converts data from the RXD pin to the receive shift register. A narrow pulse is expected for each zero received and no pulse is expected for each one received. A narrow high pulse is expected for a zero bit when RXPOL is cleared, while a narrow low pulse is expected for a zero bit when RXPOL is set. This receive decoder meets the edge jitter requirement as defined by the IrDA serial infrared physical layer specification. 11.4.2 LIN Support This module provides some basic support for the LIN protocol. At first this is a break detect circuitry making it easier for the LIN software to distinguish a break character from an incoming data stream. As a further addition is supports a collision detection at the bit level as well as cancelling pending transmissions. 11.4.3 Data Format The SCI uses the standard NRZ mark/space data format. When Infrared is enabled, the SCI uses RZI data format where zeroes are represented by light pulses and ones remain low. See Figure 11-15 below. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 378 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 8-Bit Data Format (Bit M in SCICR1 Clear) Start Bit Possible Parity Bit Bit 6 Bit 7 STOP Bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Next Start Bit Standard SCI Data Infrared SCI Data 9-Bit Data Format (Bit M in SCICR1 Set) Start Bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 POSSIBLE PARITY Bit Bit 8 STOP Bit NEXT START Bit Standard SCI Data Infrared SCI Data Figure 11-15. SCI Data Formats Each data character is contained in a frame that includes a start bit, eight or nine data bits, and a stop bit. Clearing the M bit in SCI control register 1 configures the SCI for 8-bit data characters. A frame with eight data bits has a total of 10 bits. Setting the M bit configures the SCI for nine-bit data characters. A frame with nine data bits has a total of 11 bits. Table 11-14. Example of 8-Bit Data Formats Start Bit 1 1 Data Bits 8 7 Address Bits 0 0 (1) Parity Bits 0 1 Stop Bit 1 1 0 1 1 7 1 1. The address bit identifies the frame as an address character. See Section 11.4.6.6, “Receiver Wakeup”. When the SCI is configured for 9-bit data characters, the ninth data bit is the T8 bit in SCI data register high (SCIDRH). It remains unchanged after transmission and can be used repeatedly without rewriting it. A frame with nine data bits has a total of 11 bits. Table 11-15. Example of 9-Bit Data Formats Start Bit 1 1 Data Bits 9 8 Address Bits 0 0 (1) Parity Bits 0 1 Stop Bit 1 1 0 1 1 8 1 1. The address bit identifies the frame as an address character. See Section 11.4.6.6, “Receiver Wakeup”. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 379 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.4.4 Baud Rate Generation A 13-bit modulus counter in the baud rate generator derives the baud rate for both the receiver and the transmitter. The value from 0 to 8191 written to the SBR12:SBR0 bits determines the bus clock divisor. The SBR bits are in the SCI baud rate registers (SCIBDH and SCIBDL). The baud rate clock is synchronized with the bus clock and drives the receiver. The baud rate clock divided by 16 drives the transmitter. The receiver has an acquisition rate of 16 samples per bit time. Baud rate generation is subject to one source of error: • Integer division of the bus clock may not give the exact target frequency. Table 11-16 lists some examples of achieving target baud rates with a bus clock frequency of 25 MHz. When IREN = 0 then, SCI baud rate = SCI bus clock / (16 * SCIBR[12:0]) Table 11-16. Baud Rates (Example: Bus Clock = 25 MHz) Bits SBR[12:0] 41 81 163 326 651 1302 2604 5208 Receiver Clock (Hz) 609,756.1 308,642.0 153,374.2 76,687.1 38,402.5 19,201.2 9600.6 4800.0 Transmitter Clock (Hz) 38,109.8 19,290.1 9585.9 4792.9 2400.2 1200.1 600.0 300.0 Target Baud Rate 38,400 19,200 9,600 4,800 2,400 1,200 600 300 Error (%) .76 .47 .16 .15 .01 .01 .00 .00 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 380 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.4.5 Transmitter Internal Bus Bus Clock Baud Divider ÷ 16 SCI Data Registers SBR12:SBR0 Start Stop 11-Bit Transmit Register 8 MSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TXPOL SCTXD M H L T8 Load from SCIDR Preamble (All 1s) Break (All 0s) LOOP CONTROL To Receiver PT TDRE IRQ Parity Generation TIE TDRE Shift Enable PE LOOPS RSRC Transmitter Control TC IRQ TC TCIE TE SBK BERRM[1:0] BERRIF BER IRQ TCIE Transmit Collision Detect SCTXD SCRXD (From Receiver) Figure 11-16. Transmitter Block Diagram 11.4.5.1 Transmitter Character Length The SCI transmitter can accommodate either 8-bit or 9-bit data characters. The state of the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1) determines the length of data characters. When transmitting 9-bit data, bit T8 in SCI data register high (SCIDRH) is the ninth bit (bit 8). 11.4.5.2 Character Transmission To transmit data, the MCU writes the data bits to the SCI data registers (SCIDRH/SCIDRL), which in turn are transferred to the transmitter shift register. The transmit shift register then shifts a frame out through the TXD pin, after it has prefaced them with a start bit and appended them with a stop bit. The SCI data registers (SCIDRH and SCIDRL) are the write-only buffers between the internal data bus and the transmit shift register. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 381 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) The SCI also sets a flag, the transmit data register empty flag (TDRE), every time it transfers data from the buffer (SCIDRH/L) to the transmitter shift register.The transmit driver routine may respond to this flag by writing another byte to the Transmitter buffer (SCIDRH/SCIDRL), while the shift register is still shifting out the first byte. To initiate an SCI transmission: 1. Configure the SCI: a) Select a baud rate. Write this value to the SCI baud registers (SCIBDH/L) to begin the baud rate generator. Remember that the baud rate generator is disabled when the baud rate is zero. Writing to the SCIBDH has no effect without also writing to SCIBDL. b) Write to SCICR1 to configure word length, parity, and other configuration bits (LOOPS,RSRC,M,WAKE,ILT,PE,PT). c) Enable the transmitter, interrupts, receive, and wake up as required, by writing to the SCICR2 register bits (TIE,TCIE,RIE,ILIE,TE,RE,RWU,SBK). A preamble or idle character will now be shifted out of the transmitter shift register. 2. Transmit Procedure for each byte: a) Poll the TDRE flag by reading the SCISR1 or responding to the TDRE interrupt. Keep in mind that the TDRE bit resets to one. b) If the TDRE flag is set, write the data to be transmitted to SCIDRH/L, where the ninth bit is written to the T8 bit in SCIDRH if the SCI is in 9-bit data format. A new transmission will not result until the TDRE flag has been cleared. 3. Repeat step 2 for each subsequent transmission. NOTE The TDRE flag is set when the shift register is loaded with the next data to be transmitted from SCIDRH/L, which happens, generally speaking, a little over half-way through the stop bit of the previous frame. Specifically, this transfer occurs 9/16ths of a bit time AFTER the start of the stop bit of the previous frame. Writing the TE bit from 0 to a 1 automatically loads the transmit shift register with a preamble of 10 logic 1s (if M = 0) or 11 logic 1s (if M = 1). After the preamble shifts out, control logic transfers the data from the SCI data register into the transmit shift register. A logic 0 start bit automatically goes into the least significant bit position of the transmit shift register. A logic 1 stop bit goes into the most significant bit position. Hardware supports odd or even parity. When parity is enabled, the most significant bit (MSB) of the data character is the parity bit. The transmit data register empty flag, TDRE, in SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) becomes set when the SCI data register transfers a byte to the transmit shift register. The TDRE flag indicates that the SCI data register can accept new data from the internal data bus. If the transmit interrupt enable bit, TIE, in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2) is also set, the TDRE flag generates a transmitter interrupt request. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 382 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) When the transmit shift register is not transmitting a frame, the TXD pin goes to the idle condition, logic 1. If at any time software clears the TE bit in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2), the transmitter enable signal goes low and the transmit signal goes idle. If software clears TE while a transmission is in progress (TC = 0), the frame in the transmit shift register continues to shift out. To avoid accidentally cutting off the last frame in a message, always wait for TDRE to go high after the last frame before clearing TE. To separate messages with preambles with minimum idle line time, use this sequence between messages: 1. Write the last byte of the first message to SCIDRH/L. 2. Wait for the TDRE flag to go high, indicating the transfer of the last frame to the transmit shift register. 3. Queue a preamble by clearing and then setting the TE bit. 4. Write the first byte of the second message to SCIDRH/L. 11.4.5.3 Break Characters Writing a logic 1 to the send break bit, SBK, in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2) loads the transmit shift register with a break character. A break character contains all logic 0s and has no start, stop, or parity bit. Break character length depends on the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). As long as SBK is at logic 1, transmitter logic continuously loads break characters into the transmit shift register. After software clears the SBK bit, the shift register finishes transmitting the last break character and then transmits at least one logic 1. The automatic logic 1 at the end of a break character guarantees the recognition of the start bit of the next frame. The SCI recognizes a break character when there are 10 or 11(M = 0 or M = 1) consecutive zero received. Depending if the break detect feature is enabled or not receiving a break character has these effects on SCI registers. If the break detect feature is disabled (BKDFE = 0): • Sets the framing error flag, FE • Sets the receive data register full flag, RDRF • Clears the SCI data registers (SCIDRH/L) • May set the overrun flag, OR, noise flag, NF, parity error flag, PE, or the receiver active flag, RAF (see 3.4.4 and 3.4.5 SCI Status Register 1 and 2) If the break detect feature is enabled (BKDFE = 1) there are two scenarios1 The break is detected right from a start bit or is detected during a byte reception. • Sets the break detect interrupt flag, BLDIF • Does not change the data register full flag, RDRF or overrun flag OR • Does not change the framing error flag FE, parity error flag PE. • Does not clear the SCI data registers (SCIDRH/L) • May set noise flag NF, or receiver active flag RAF. 1. A Break character in this context are either 10 or 11 consecutive zero received bits S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 383 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Figure 11-17 shows two cases of break detect. In trace RXD_1 the break symbol starts with the start bit, while in RXD_2 the break starts in the middle of a transmission. If BRKDFE = 1, in RXD_1 case there will be no byte transferred to the receive buffer and the RDRF flag will not be modified. Also no framing error or parity error will be flagged from this transfer. In RXD_2 case, however the break signal starts later during the transmission. At the expected stop bit position the byte received so far will be transferred to the receive buffer, the receive data register full flag will be set, a framing error and if enabled and appropriate a parity error will be set. Once the break is detected the BRKDIF flag will be set. Start Bit Position Stop Bit Position BRKDIF = 1 RXD_1 Zero Bit Counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 . . . FE = 1 RXD_2 BRKDIF = 1 Zero Bit Counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ... Figure 11-17. Break Detection if BRKDFE = 1 (M = 0) 11.4.5.4 Idle Characters An idle character (or preamble) contains all logic 1s and has no start, stop, or parity bit. Idle character length depends on the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). The preamble is a synchronizing idle character that begins the first transmission initiated after writing the TE bit from 0 to 1. If the TE bit is cleared during a transmission, the TXD pin becomes idle after completion of the transmission in progress. Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a transmission queues an idle character to be sent after the frame currently being transmitted. NOTE When queueing an idle character, return the TE bit to logic 1 before the stop bit of the current frame shifts out through the TXD pin. Setting TE after the stop bit appears on TXD causes data previously written to the SCI data register to be lost. Toggle the TE bit for a queued idle character while the TDRE flag is set and immediately before writing the next byte to the SCI data register. If the TE bit is clear and the transmission is complete, the SCI is not the master of the TXD pin S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 384 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.4.5.5 LIN Transmit Collision Detection LIN Physical Interface This module allows to check for collisions on the LIN bus. Synchronizer Stage Receive Shift Register Compare Bit Error Bus Clock RXD Pin LIN Bus Sample Point Transmit Shift Register TXD Pin Figure 11-18. Collision Detect Principle If the bit error circuit is enabled (BERRM[1:0] = 0:1 or = 1:0]), the error detect circuit will compare the transmitted and the received data stream at a point in time and flag any mismatch. The timing checks run when transmitter is active (not idle). As soon as a mismatch between the transmitted data and the received data is detected the following happens: • The next bit transmitted will have a high level (TXPOL = 0) or low level (TXPOL = 1) • The transmission is aborted and the byte in transmit buffer is discarded. • the transmit data register empty and the transmission complete flag will be set • The bit error interrupt flag, BERRIF, will be set. • No further transmissions will take place until the BERRIF is cleared. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sampling Begin 9 Sampling End 10 11 12 Sampling Begin 13 Sampling End 14 15 0 Output Transmit Shift Register Input Receive Shift Register BERRM[1:0] = 0:1 BERRM[1:0] = 1:1 Compare Sample Points Figure 11-19. Timing Diagram Bit Error Detection If the bit error detect feature is disabled, the bit error interrupt flag is cleared. NOTE The RXPOL and TXPOL bit should be set the same when transmission collision detect feature is enabled, otherwise the bit error interrupt flag may be set incorrectly. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 385 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.4.6 Receiver Internal Bus SBR12:SBR0 SCI Data Register 11-Bit Receive Shift Register 8 7 6 All 1s 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXPOL SCRXD From TXD Pin or Transmitter Loop Control Data Recovery H RE RAF MSB LOOPS RSRC FE M WAKE ILT PE PT Wakeup Logic NF PE RWU Parity Checking R8 IDLE ILIE Idle IRQ Start L RDRF/OR IRQ BRKDFE Stop Bus Clock Baud Divider RDRF OR RIE Break IRQ Break Detect Logic BRKDIF BRKDIE Active Edge Detect Logic RXEDGIF RXEDGIE RX Active Edge IRQ Figure 11-20. SCI Receiver Block Diagram 11.4.6.1 Receiver Character Length The SCI receiver can accommodate either 8-bit or 9-bit data characters. The state of the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1) determines the length of data characters. When receiving 9-bit data, bit R8 in SCI data register high (SCIDRH) is the ninth bit (bit 8). 11.4.6.2 Character Reception During an SCI reception, the receive shift register shifts a frame in from the RXD pin. The SCI data register is the read-only buffer between the internal data bus and the receive shift register. After a complete frame shifts into the receive shift register, the data portion of the frame transfers to the SCI data register. The receive data register full flag, RDRF, in SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) becomes set, S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 386 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) indicating that the received byte can be read. If the receive interrupt enable bit, RIE, in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2) is also set, the RDRF flag generates an RDRF interrupt request. 11.4.6.3 Data Sampling The RT clock rate. The RT clock is an internal signal with a frequency 16 times the baud rate. To adjust for baud rate mismatch, the RT clock (see Figure 11-21) is re-synchronized: • After every start bit • After the receiver detects a data bit change from logic 1 to logic 0 (after the majority of data bit samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10 returns a valid logic 1 and the majority of the next RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples returns a valid logic 0) To locate the start bit, data recovery logic does an asynchronous search for a logic 0 preceded by three logic 1s.When the falling edge of a possible start bit occurs, the RT clock begins to count to 16. Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSB Start Bit Qualification Start Bit Verification Data Sampling RT Clock RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT CLock Count Reset RT Clock RT16 RT4 Figure 11-21. Receiver Data Sampling To verify the start bit and to detect noise, data recovery logic takes samples at RT3, RT5, and RT7. Figure 11-17 summarizes the results of the start bit verification samples. Table 11-17. Start Bit Verification RT3, RT5, and RT7 Samples 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Start Bit Verification Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No Noise Flag 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 If start bit verification is not successful, the RT clock is reset and a new search for a start bit begins. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 387 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) To determine the value of a data bit and to detect noise, recovery logic takes samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10. Table 11-18 summarizes the results of the data bit samples. Table 11-18. Data Bit Recovery RT8, RT9, and RT10 Samples 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Data Bit Determination 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Noise Flag 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 NOTE The RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples do not affect start bit verification. If any or all of the RT8, RT9, and RT10 start bit samples are logic 1s following a successful start bit verification, the noise flag (NF) is set and the receiver assumes that the bit is a start bit (logic 0). To verify a stop bit and to detect noise, recovery logic takes samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10. Table 11-19 summarizes the results of the stop bit samples. Table 11-19. Stop Bit Recovery RT8, RT9, and RT10 Samples 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Framing Error Flag 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Noise Flag 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 In Figure 11-22 the verification samples RT3 and RT5 determine that the first low detected was noise and not the beginning of a start bit. The RT clock is reset and the start bit search begins again. The noise flag is not set because the noise occurred before the start bit was found. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 388 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSB RT Clock RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT1 RT2 LSB RT6 RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT Clock Count Reset RT Clock RT16 RT3 RT7 Figure 11-22. Start Bit Search Example 1 In Figure 11-23, verification sample at RT3 is high. The RT3 sample sets the noise flag. Although the perceived bit time is misaligned, the data samples RT8, RT9, and RT10 are within the bit time and data recovery is successful. Perceived Start Bit Actual Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 RT Clock RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT16 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT Clock Count Reset RT Clock RT5 Figure 11-23. Start Bit Search Example 2 In Figure 11-24, a large burst of noise is perceived as the beginning of a start bit, although the test sample at RT5 is high. The RT5 sample sets the noise flag. Although this is a worst-case misalignment of perceived bit time, the data samples RT8, RT9, and RT10 are within the bit time and data recovery is successful. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 389 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Perceived Start Bit Actual Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 LSB RT Clock RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 LSB RT2 RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT Clock Count Reset RT Clock RT16 RT9 RT3 Figure 11-24. Start Bit Search Example 3 Figure 11-25 shows the effect of noise early in the start bit time. Although this noise does not affect proper synchronization with the start bit time, it does set the noise flag. Perceived and Actual Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 RT Clock RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT Clock Count Reset RT Clock Figure 11-25. Start Bit Search Example 4 Figure 11-26 shows a burst of noise near the beginning of the start bit that resets the RT clock. The sample after the reset is low but is not preceded by three high samples that would qualify as a falling edge. Depending on the timing of the start bit search and on the data, the frame may be missed entirely or it may set the framing error flag. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 390 Freescale Semiconductor RT16 RT1 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 No Start Bit Found 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSB RT Clock RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 LSB RT2 RT Clock Count Reset RT Clock RT1 RT3 Figure 11-26. Start Bit Search Example 5 In Figure 11-27, a noise burst makes the majority of data samples RT8, RT9, and RT10 high. This sets the noise flag but does not reset the RT clock. In start bits only, the RT8, RT9, and RT10 data samples are ignored. Start Bit RXD Samples 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 RT Clock RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT Clock Count Reset RT Clock RT16 RT1 Figure 11-27. Start Bit Search Example 6 11.4.6.4 Framing Errors If the data recovery logic does not detect a logic 1 where the stop bit should be in an incoming frame, it sets the framing error flag, FE, in SCI status register 1 (SCISR1). A break character also sets the FE flag because a break character has no stop bit. The FE flag is set at the same time that the RDRF flag is set. 11.4.6.5 Baud Rate Tolerance A transmitting device may be operating at a baud rate below or above the receiver baud rate. Accumulated bit time misalignment can cause one of the three stop bit data samples (RT8, RT9, and RT10) to fall outside the actual stop bit. A noise error will occur if the RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples are not all the same logical values. A framing error will occur if the receiver clock is misaligned in such a way that the majority of the RT8, RT9, and RT10 stop bit samples are a logic zero. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 391 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) As the receiver samples an incoming frame, it re-synchronizes the RT clock on any valid falling edge within the frame. Re synchronization within frames will correct a misalignment between transmitter bit times and receiver bit times. 11.4.6.5.1 Slow Data Tolerance Figure 11-28 shows how much a slow received frame can be misaligned without causing a noise error or a framing error. The slow stop bit begins at RT8 instead of RT1 but arrives in time for the stop bit data samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10. MSB Stop Receiver RT Clock RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT16 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 Data Samples Figure 11-28. Slow Data Let’s take RTr as receiver RT clock and RTt as transmitter RT clock. For an 8-bit data character, it takes the receiver 9 bit times x 16 RTr cycles +7 RTr cycles = 151 RTr cycles to start data sampling of the stop bit. With the misaligned character shown in Figure 11-28, the receiver counts 151 RTr cycles at the point when the count of the transmitting device is 9 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 144 RTt cycles. The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a slow 8-bit data character with no errors is: ((151 – 144) / 151) x 100 = 4.63% For a 9-bit data character, it takes the receiver 10 bit times x 16 RTr cycles + 7 RTr cycles = 167 RTr cycles to start data sampling of the stop bit. With the misaligned character shown in Figure 11-28, the receiver counts 167 RTr cycles at the point when the count of the transmitting device is 10 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 160 RTt cycles. The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a slow 9-bit character with no errors is: ((167 – 160) / 167) X 100 = 4.19% 11.4.6.5.2 Fast Data Tolerance Figure 11-29 shows how much a fast received frame can be misaligned. The fast stop bit ends at RT10 instead of RT16 but is still sampled at RT8, RT9, and RT10. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 392 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) Stop Idle or Next Frame Receiver RT Clock RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT16 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 Data Samples Figure 11-29. Fast Data For an 8-bit data character, it takes the receiver 9 bit times x 16 RTr cycles + 10 RTr cycles = 154 RTr cycles to finish data sampling of the stop bit. With the misaligned character shown in Figure 11-29, the receiver counts 154 RTr cycles at the point when the count of the transmitting device is 10 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 160 RTt cycles. The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a fast 8-bit character with no errors is: ((160 – 154) / 160) x 100 = 3.75% For a 9-bit data character, it takes the receiver 10 bit times x 16 RTr cycles + 10 RTr cycles = 170 RTr cycles to finish data sampling of the stop bit. With the misaligned character shown in Figure 11-29, the receiver counts 170 RTr cycles at the point when the count of the transmitting device is 11 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 176 RTt cycles. The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a fast 9-bit character with no errors is: ((176 – 170) /176) x 100 = 3.40% 11.4.6.6 Receiver Wakeup To enable the SCI to ignore transmissions intended only for other receivers in multiple-receiver systems, the receiver can be put into a standby state. Setting the receiver wakeup bit, RWU, in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2) puts the receiver into standby state during which receiver interrupts are disabled.The SCI will still load the receive data into the SCIDRH/L registers, but it will not set the RDRF flag. The transmitting device can address messages to selected receivers by including addressing information in the initial frame or frames of each message. The WAKE bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1) determines how the SCI is brought out of the standby state to process an incoming message. The WAKE bit enables either idle line wakeup or address mark wakeup. 11.4.6.6.1 Idle Input line Wakeup (WAKE = 0) In this wakeup method, an idle condition on the RXD pin clears the RWU bit and wakes up the SCI. The initial frame or frames of every message contain addressing information. All receivers evaluate the addressing information, and receivers for which the message is addressed process the frames that follow. Any receiver for which a message is not addressed can set its RWU bit and return to the standby state. The S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 393 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) RWU bit remains set and the receiver remains on standby until another idle character appears on the RXD pin. Idle line wakeup requires that messages be separated by at least one idle character and that no message contains idle characters. The idle character that wakes a receiver does not set the receiver idle bit, IDLE, or the receive data register full flag, RDRF. The idle line type bit, ILT, determines whether the receiver begins counting logic 1s as idle character bits after the start bit or after the stop bit. ILT is in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). 11.4.6.6.2 Address Mark Wakeup (WAKE = 1) In this wakeup method, a logic 1 in the most significant bit (MSB) position of a frame clears the RWU bit and wakes up the SCI. The logic 1 in the MSB position marks a frame as an address frame that contains addressing information. All receivers evaluate the addressing information, and the receivers for which the message is addressed process the frames that follow.Any receiver for which a message is not addressed can set its RWU bit and return to the standby state. The RWU bit remains set and the receiver remains on standby until another address frame appears on the RXD pin. The logic 1 MSB of an address frame clears the receiver’s RWU bit before the stop bit is received and sets the RDRF flag. Address mark wakeup allows messages to contain idle characters but requires that the MSB be reserved for use in address frames. NOTE With the WAKE bit clear, setting the RWU bit after the RXD pin has been idle can cause the receiver to wake up immediately. 11.4.7 Single-Wire Operation Normally, the SCI uses two pins for transmitting and receiving. In single-wire operation, the RXD pin is disconnected from the SCI. The SCI uses the TXD pin for both receiving and transmitting. Transmitter TXD Receiver RXD Figure 11-30. Single-Wire Operation (LOOPS = 1, RSRC = 1) Enable single-wire operation by setting the LOOPS bit and the receiver source bit, RSRC, in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). Setting the LOOPS bit disables the path from the RXD pin to the receiver. Setting the RSRC bit connects the TXD pin to the receiver. Both the transmitter and receiver must be enabled (TE = 1 and RE = 1).The TXDIR bit (SCISR2[1]) determines whether the TXD pin is going to be used as an input (TXDIR = 0) or an output (TXDIR = 1) in this mode of operation. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 394 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) NOTE In single-wire operation data from the TXD pin is inverted if RXPOL is set. 11.4.8 Loop Operation In loop operation the transmitter output goes to the receiver input. The RXD pin is disconnected from the SCI. Transmitter TXD Receiver RXD Figure 11-31. Loop Operation (LOOPS = 1, RSRC = 0) Enable loop operation by setting the LOOPS bit and clearing the RSRC bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). Setting the LOOPS bit disables the path from the RXD pin to the receiver. Clearing the RSRC bit connects the transmitter output to the receiver input. Both the transmitter and receiver must be enabled (TE = 1 and RE = 1). NOTE In loop operation data from the transmitter is not recognized by the receiver if RXPOL and TXPOL are not the same. 11.5 11.5.1 Initialization/Application Information Reset Initialization See Section 11.3.2, “Register Descriptions”. 11.5.2 11.5.2.1 Modes of Operation Run Mode Normal mode of operation. To initialize a SCI transmission, see Section 11.4.5.2, “Character Transmission”. 11.5.2.2 Wait Mode SCI operation in wait mode depends on the state of the SCISWAI bit in the SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). • If SCISWAI is clear, the SCI operates normally when the CPU is in wait mode. • If SCISWAI is set, SCI clock generation ceases and the SCI module enters a power-conservation state when the CPU is in wait mode. Setting SCISWAI does not affect the state of the receiver enable bit, RE, or the transmitter enable bit, TE. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 395 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) If SCISWAI is set, any transmission or reception in progress stops at wait mode entry. The transmission or reception resumes when either an internal or external interrupt brings the CPU out of wait mode. Exiting wait mode by reset aborts any transmission or reception in progress and resets the SCI. 11.5.2.3 Stop Mode The SCI is inactive during stop mode for reduced power consumption. The STOP instruction does not affect the SCI register states, but the SCI bus clock will be disabled. The SCI operation resumes from where it left off after an external interrupt brings the CPU out of stop mode. Exiting stop mode by reset aborts any transmission or reception in progress and resets the SCI. The receive input active edge detect circuit is still active in stop mode. An active edge on the receive input can be used to bring the CPU out of stop mode. 11.5.3 Interrupt Operation This section describes the interrupt originated by the SCI block.The MCU must service the interrupt requests. Table 11-20 lists the eight interrupt sources of the SCI. Table 11-20. SCI Interrupt Sources Interrupt TDRE TC RDRF OR IDLE Source SCISR1[7] SCISR1[6] SCISR1[5] SCISR1[3] SCISR1[4] ILIE RXEDGIE BERRIE BRKDIE Local Enable TIE TCIE RIE Description Active high level. Indicates that a byte was transferred from SCIDRH/L to the transmit shift register. Active high level. Indicates that a transmit is complete. Active high level. The RDRF interrupt indicates that received data is available in the SCI data register. Active high level. This interrupt indicates that an overrun condition has occurred. Active high level. Indicates that receiver input has become idle. Active high level. Indicates that an active edge (falling for RXPOL = 0, rising for RXPOL = 1) was detected. Active high level. Indicates that a mismatch between transmitted and received data in a single wire application has happened. Active high level. Indicates that a break character has been received. RXEDGIF SCIASR1[7] BERRIF BKDIF SCIASR1[1] SCIASR1[0] 11.5.3.1 Description of Interrupt Operation The SCI only originates interrupt requests. The following is a description of how the SCI makes a request and how the MCU should acknowledge that request. The interrupt vector offset and interrupt number are chip dependent. The SCI only has a single interrupt line (SCI Interrupt Signal, active high operation) and all the following interrupts, when generated, are ORed together and issued through that port. 11.5.3.1.1 TDRE Description The TDRE interrupt is set high by the SCI when the transmit shift register receives a byte from the SCI data register. A TDRE interrupt indicates that the transmit data register (SCIDRH/L) is empty and that a S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 396 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) new byte can be written to the SCIDRH/L for transmission.Clear TDRE by reading SCI status register 1 with TDRE set and then writing to SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 11.5.3.1.2 TC Description The TC interrupt is set by the SCI when a transmission has been completed. Transmission is completed when all bits including the stop bit (if transmitted) have been shifted out and no data is queued to be transmitted. No stop bit is transmitted when sending a break character and the TC flag is set (providing there is no more data queued for transmission) when the break character has been shifted out. A TC interrupt indicates that there is no transmission in progress. TC is set high when the TDRE flag is set and no data, preamble, or break character is being transmitted. When TC is set, the TXD pin becomes idle (logic 1). Clear TC by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with TC set and then writing to SCI data register low (SCIDRL).TC is cleared automatically when data, preamble, or break is queued and ready to be sent. 11.5.3.1.3 RDRF Description The RDRF interrupt is set when the data in the receive shift register transfers to the SCI data register. A RDRF interrupt indicates that the received data has been transferred to the SCI data register and that the byte can now be read by the MCU. The RDRF interrupt is cleared by reading the SCI status register one (SCISR1) and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 11.5.3.1.4 OR Description The OR interrupt is set when software fails to read the SCI data register before the receive shift register receives the next frame. The newly acquired data in the shift register will be lost in this case, but the data already in the SCI data registers is not affected. The OR interrupt is cleared by reading the SCI status register one (SCISR1) and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 11.5.3.1.5 IDLE Description The IDLE interrupt is set when 10 consecutive logic 1s (if M = 0) or 11 consecutive logic 1s (if M = 1) appear on the receiver input. Once the IDLE is cleared, a valid frame must again set the RDRF flag before an idle condition can set the IDLE flag. Clear IDLE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with IDLE set and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL). 11.5.3.1.6 RXEDGIF Description The RXEDGIF interrupt is set when an active edge (falling if RXPOL = 0, rising if RXPOL = 1) on the RXD pin is detected. Clear RXEDGIF by writing a “1” to the SCIASR1 SCI alternative status register 1. 11.5.3.1.7 BERRIF Description The BERRIF interrupt is set when a mismatch between the transmitted and the received data in a single wire application like LIN was detected. Clear BERRIF by writing a “1” to the SCIASR1 SCI alternative status register 1. This flag is also cleared if the bit error detect feature is disabled. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 397 Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) 11.5.3.1.8 BKDIF Description The BKDIF interrupt is set when a break signal was received. Clear BKDIF by writing a “1” to the SCIASR1 SCI alternative status register 1. This flag is also cleared if break detect feature is disabled. 11.5.4 Recovery from Wait Mode The SCI interrupt request can be used to bring the CPU out of wait mode. 11.5.5 Recovery from Stop Mode An active edge on the receive input can be used to bring the CPU out of stop mode. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 398 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 12 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-1. Revision History Revision Number V05.00 Revision Date 24 Mar 2005 Sections Affected 12.3.2/12-403 Description of Changes - Added 16-bit transfer width feature. 12.1 Introduction The SPI module allows a duplex, synchronous, serial communication between the MCU and peripheral devices. Software can poll the SPI status flags or the SPI operation can be interrupt driven. 12.1.1 Glossary of Terms SPI SS SCK MOSI MISO MOMI SISO Serial Peripheral Interface Slave Select Serial Clock Master Output, Slave Input Master Input, Slave Output Master Output, Master Input Slave Input, Slave Output 12.1.2 Features The SPI includes these distinctive features: • Master mode and slave mode • Selectable 8 or 16-bit transfer width • Bidirectional mode • Slave select output • Mode fault error flag with CPU interrupt capability • Double-buffered data register • Serial clock with programmable polarity and phase • Control of SPI operation during wait mode 12.1.3 Modes of Operation The SPI functions in three modes: run, wait, and stop. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 399 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) • • • Run mode This is the basic mode of operation. Wait mode SPI operation in wait mode is a configurable low power mode, controlled by the SPISWAI bit located in the SPICR2 register. In wait mode, if the SPISWAI bit is clear, the SPI operates like in run mode. If the SPISWAI bit is set, the SPI goes into a power conservative state, with the SPI clock generation turned off. If the SPI is configured as a master, any transmission in progress stops, but is resumed after CPU goes into run mode. If the SPI is configured as a slave, reception and transmission of data continues, so that the slave stays synchronized to the master. Stop mode The SPI is inactive in stop mode for reduced power consumption. If the SPI is configured as a master, any transmission in progress stops, but is resumed after CPU goes into run mode. If the SPI is configured as a slave, reception and transmission of data continues, so that the slave stays synchronized to the master. For a detailed description of operating modes, please refer to Section 12.4.7, “Low Power Mode Options”. 12.1.4 Block Diagram Figure 12-1 gives an overview on the SPI architecture. The main parts of the SPI are status, control and data registers, shifter logic, baud rate generator, master/slave control logic, and port control logic. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 400 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) SPI 2 SPI Control Register 1 BIDIROE 2 SPI Control Register 2 SPC0 SPI Status Register SPIF MODF SPTEF Interrupt Control SPI Interrupt Request Baud Rate Generator Counter Bus Clock Prescaler Clock Select SPPR 3 SPR 3 Shifter SPI Baud Rate Register LSBFE=1 SPI Data Register LSBFE=0 MSB LSBFE=0 LSBFE=1 LSBFE=0 LSB LSBFE=1 Data Out Data In Baud Rate Shift Clock Sample Clock Slave Control CPOL CPHA MOSI Phase + SCK In Slave Baud Rate Polarity Control Master Baud Rate Phase + SCK Out Polarity Control Master Control Port Control Logic SCK SS Figure 12-1. SPI Block Diagram 12.2 External Signal Description This section lists the name and description of all ports including inputs and outputs that do, or may, connect off chip. The SPI module has a total of four external pins. 12.2.1 MOSI — Master Out/Slave In Pin This pin is used to transmit data out of the SPI module when it is configured as a master and receive data when it is configured as slave. 12.2.2 MISO — Master In/Slave Out Pin This pin is used to transmit data out of the SPI module when it is configured as a slave and receive data when it is configured as master. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 401 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) 12.2.3 SS — Slave Select Pin This pin is used to output the select signal from the SPI module to another peripheral with which a data transfer is to take place when it is configured as a master and it is used as an input to receive the slave select signal when the SPI is configured as slave. 12.2.4 SCK — Serial Clock Pin In master mode, this is the synchronous output clock. In slave mode, this is the synchronous input clock. 12.3 12.3.1 Memory Map and Register Definition Module Memory Map This section provides a detailed description of address space and registers used by the SPI. The memory map for the SPI is given in Figure 12-2. The address listed for each register is the sum of a base address and an address offset. The base address is defined at the SoC level and the address offset is defined at the module level. Reads from the reserved bits return zeros and writes to the reserved bits have no effect. Register Name 0x0000 SPICR1 0x0001 SPICR2 0x0002 SPIBR 0x0003 SPISR 0x0004 SPIDRH 0x0005 SPIDRL 0x0006 Reserved 0x0007 Reserved R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W = Unimplemented or Reserved Bit 7 SPIE 0 6 SPE 5 SPTIE 0 4 MSTR 3 CPOL 2 CPHA 0 1 SSOE Bit 0 LSBFE XFRW MODFEN BIDIROE 0 SPISWAI SPC0 0 SPPR2 0 SPPR1 SPTEF SPPR0 MODF SPR2 0 SPR1 0 SPR0 0 SPIF 0 R15 T15 R7 T7 R14 T14 R6 T6 R13 T13 R5 T5 R12 T12 R4 T4 R11 T11 R3 T3 R10 T10 R2 T2 R9 T9 R1 T1 R8 T8 R0 T0 Figure 12-2. SPI Register Summary S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 402 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) 12.3.2 Register Descriptions This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register diagram with an associated figure number. Details of register bit and field function follow the register diagrams, in bit order. 12.3.2.1 SPI Control Register 1 (SPICR1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module Base +0x0000 R W Reset SPIE 0 SPE 0 SPTIE 0 MSTR 0 CPOL 0 CPHA 1 SSOE 0 LSBFE 0 Figure 12-3. SPI Control Register 1 (SPICR1) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 12-2. SPICR1 Field Descriptions Field 7 SPIE 6 SPE Description SPI Interrupt Enable Bit — This bit enables SPI interrupt requests, if SPIF or MODF status flag is set. 0 SPI interrupts disabled. 1 SPI interrupts enabled. SPI System Enable Bit — This bit enables the SPI system and dedicates the SPI port pins to SPI system functions. If SPE is cleared, SPI is disabled and forced into idle state, status bits in SPISR register are reset. 0 SPI disabled (lower power consumption). 1 SPI enabled, port pins are dedicated to SPI functions. SPI Transmit Interrupt Enable — This bit enables SPI interrupt requests, if SPTEF flag is set. 0 SPTEF interrupt disabled. 1 SPTEF interrupt enabled. SPI Master/Slave Mode Select Bit — This bit selects whether the SPI operates in master or slave mode. Switching the SPI from master to slave or vice versa forces the SPI system into idle state. 0 SPI is in slave mode. 1 SPI is in master mode. SPI Clock Polarity Bit — This bit selects an inverted or non-inverted SPI clock. To transmit data between SPI modules, the SPI modules must have identical CPOL values. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. 0 Active-high clocks selected. In idle state SCK is low. 1 Active-low clocks selected. In idle state SCK is high. SPI Clock Phase Bit — This bit is used to select the SPI clock format. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. 0 Sampling of data occurs at odd edges (1,3,5,...) of the SCK clock. 1 Sampling of data occurs at even edges (2,4,6,...) of the SCK clock. 5 SPTIE 4 MSTR 3 CPOL 2 CPHA S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 403 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-2. SPICR1 Field Descriptions (continued) Field 1 SSOE 0 LSBFE Description Slave Select Output Enable — The SS output feature is enabled only in master mode, if MODFEN is set, by asserting the SSOE as shown in Table 12-3. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. LSB-First Enable — This bit does not affect the position of the MSB and LSB in the data register. Reads and writes of the data register always have the MSB in the highest bit position. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. 0 Data is transferred most significant bit first. 1 Data is transferred least significant bit first. Table 12-3. SS Input / Output Selection MODFEN 0 0 1 1 SSOE 0 1 0 1 Master Mode SS not used by SPI SS not used by SPI SS input with MODF feature SS is slave select output Slave Mode SS input SS input SS input SS input 12.3.2.2 SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module Base +0x0001 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFRW 0 MODFEN 0 BIDIROE 0 SPISWAI 0 SPC0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 12-4. SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime; writes to the reserved bits have no effect S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 404 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-4. SPICR2 Field Descriptions Field 6 XFRW Description Transfer Width — This bit is used for selecting the data transfer width. If 8-bit transfer width is selected, SPIDRL becomes the dedicated data register and SPIDRH is unused. If 16-bit transfer width is selected, SPIDRH and SPIDRL form a 16-bit data register. Please refer to Section 12.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR) for information about transmit/receive data handling and the interrupt flag clearing mechanism. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. 0 8-bit Transfer Width (n = 8)(1) 1 16-bit Transfer Width (n = 16)1 Mode Fault Enable Bit — This bit allows the MODF failure to be detected. If the SPI is in master mode and MODFEN is cleared, then the SS port pin is not used by the SPI. In slave mode, the SS is available only as an input regardless of the value of MODFEN. For an overview on the impact of the MODFEN bit on the SS port pin configuration, refer to Table 12-3. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. 0 SS port pin is not used by the SPI. 1 SS port pin with MODF feature. Output Enable in the Bidirectional Mode of Operation — This bit controls the MOSI and MISO output buffer of the SPI, when in bidirectional mode of operation (SPC0 is set). In master mode, this bit controls the output buffer of the MOSI port, in slave mode it controls the output buffer of the MISO port. In master mode, with SPC0 set, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI into idle state. 0 Output buffer disabled. 1 Output buffer enabled. SPI Stop in Wait Mode Bit — This bit is used for power conservation while in wait mode. 0 SPI clock operates normally in wait mode. 1 Stop SPI clock generation when in wait mode. 4 MODFEN 3 BIDIROE 1 SPISWAI 0 Serial Pin Control Bit 0 — This bit enables bidirectional pin configurations as shown in Table 12-5. In master SPC0 mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. 1. n is used later in this document as a placeholder for the selected transfer width. Table 12-5. Bidirectional Pin Configurations Pin Mode SPC0 BIDIROE MISO MOSI Master Mode of Operation Normal Bidirectional 0 1 X 0 1 Slave Mode of Operation Normal Bidirectional 0 1 X 0 1 Slave Out Slave In Slave I/O Slave In MOSI not used by SPI Master In MISO not used by SPI Master Out Master In Master I/O S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 405 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) 12.3.2.3 SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIBR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module Base +0x0002 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 SPPR2 0 SPPR1 0 SPPR0 0 SPR2 0 SPR1 0 SPR0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 12-5. SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIBR) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime; writes to the reserved bits have no effect Table 12-6. SPIBR Field Descriptions Field 6–4 SPPR[2:0] 2–0 SPR[2:0] Description SPI Baud Rate Preselection Bits — These bits specify the SPI baud rates as shown in Table 12-7. In master mode, a change of these bits will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. SPI Baud Rate Selection Bits — These bits specify the SPI baud rates as shown in Table 12-7. In master mode, a change of these bits will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. The baud rate divisor equation is as follows: BaudRateDivisor = (SPPR + 1) • 2(SPR + 1) Eqn. 12-1 The baud rate can be calculated with the following equation: Baud Rate = BusClock / BaudRateDivisor Eqn. 12-2 NOTE For maximum allowed baud rates, please refer to the SPI Electrical Specification in the Electricals chapter of this data sheet. Table 12-7. Example SPI Baud Rate Selection (25 MHz Bus Clock) (Sheet 1 of 3) SPPR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPPR1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPPR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 SPR2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 SPR1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 SPR0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Baud Rate Divisor 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 4 8 16 32 Baud Rate 12.5 Mbit/s 6.25 Mbit/s 3.125 Mbit/s 1.5625 Mbit/s 781.25 kbit/s 390.63 kbit/s 195.31 kbit/s 97.66 kbit/s 6.25 Mbit/s 3.125 Mbit/s 1.5625 Mbit/s 781.25 kbit/s S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 406 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-7. Example SPI Baud Rate Selection (25 MHz Bus Clock) (Sheet 2 of 3) SPPR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPPR1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPPR0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPR2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 SPR1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 SPR0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Baud Rate Divisor 64 128 256 512 6 12 24 48 96 192 384 768 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 10 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 12 24 48 96 192 384 768 1536 14 28 56 112 224 448 Baud Rate 390.63 kbit/s 195.31 kbit/s 97.66 kbit/s 48.83 kbit/s 4.16667 Mbit/s 2.08333 Mbit/s 1.04167 Mbit/s 520.83 kbit/s 260.42 kbit/s 130.21 kbit/s 65.10 kbit/s 32.55 kbit/s 3.125 Mbit/s 1.5625 Mbit/s 781.25 kbit/s 390.63 kbit/s 195.31 kbit/s 97.66 kbit/s 48.83 kbit/s 24.41 kbit/s 2.5 Mbit/s 1.25 Mbit/s 625 kbit/s 312.5 kbit/s 156.25 kbit/s 78.13 kbit/s 39.06 kbit/s 19.53 kbit/s 2.08333 Mbit/s 1.04167 Mbit/s 520.83 kbit/s 260.42 kbit/s 130.21 kbit/s 65.10 kbit/s 32.55 kbit/s 16.28 kbit/s 1.78571 Mbit/s 892.86 kbit/s 446.43 kbit/s 223.21 kbit/s 111.61 kbit/s 55.80 kbit/s S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 407 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-7. Example SPI Baud Rate Selection (25 MHz Bus Clock) (Sheet 3 of 3) SPPR2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPPR1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPPR0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPR2 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 SPR1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 SPR0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Baud Rate Divisor 896 1792 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 Baud Rate 27.90 kbit/s 13.95 kbit/s 1.5625 Mbit/s 781.25 kbit/s 390.63 kbit/s 195.31 kbit/s 97.66 kbit/s 48.83 kbit/s 24.41 kbit/s 12.21 kbit/s 12.3.2.4 SPI Status Register (SPISR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module Base +0x0003 R W Reset 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved SPIF 0 SPTEF MODF 0 0 0 0 Figure 12-6. SPI Status Register (SPISR) Read: Anytime Write: Has no effect Table 12-8. SPISR Field Descriptions Field 7 SPIF Description SPIF Interrupt Flag — This bit is set after received data has been transferred into the SPI data register. For information about clearing SPIF Flag, please refer to Table 12-9. 0 Transfer not yet complete. 1 New data copied to SPIDR. SPI Transmit Empty Interrupt Flag — If set, this bit indicates that the transmit data register is empty. For information about clearing this bit and placing data into the transmit data register, please refer to Table 12-10. 0 SPI data register not empty. 1 SPI data register empty. Mode Fault Flag — This bit is set if the SS input becomes low while the SPI is configured as a master and mode fault detection is enabled, MODFEN bit of SPICR2 register is set. Refer to MODFEN bit description in Section 12.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)”. The flag is cleared automatically by a read of the SPI status register (with MODF set) followed by a write to the SPI control register 1. 0 Mode fault has not occurred. 1 Mode fault has occurred. 5 SPTEF 4 MODF S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 408 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-9. SPIF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence XFRW Bit 0 1 SPIF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence Read SPISR with SPIF == 1 Read SPISR with SPIF == 1 then Read SPIDRL Byte Read SPIDRL (1) or then Byte Read SPIDRH (2) or Word Read (SPIDRH:SPIDRL) 1. Data in SPIDRH is lost in this case. 2. SPIDRH can be read repeatedly without any effect on SPIF. SPIF Flag is cleared only by the read of SPIDRL after reading SPISR with SPIF == 1. Byte Read SPIDRL Table 12-10. SPTEF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence XFRW Bit 0 1 SPTEF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence Read SPISR with SPTEF == 1 then Read SPISR with SPTEF == 1 Write to SPIDRL (1) Byte Write to SPIDRL 1(2) or then Byte Write to SPIDRH 1(3) Byte Write to SPIDRL 1 or Word Write to (SPIDRH:SPIDRL) 1 1. Any write to SPIDRH or SPIDRL with SPTEF == 0 is effectively ignored. 2. Data in SPIDRH is undefined in this case. 3. SPIDRH can be written repeatedly without any effect on SPTEF. SPTEF Flag is cleared only by writing to SPIDRL after reading SPISR with SPTEF == 1. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 409 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) 12.3.2.5 SPI Data Register (SPIDR = SPIDRH:SPIDRL) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module Base +0x0004 R W Reset R15 T15 0 R14 T14 0 R13 T13 0 R12 T12 0 R11 T11 0 R10 T10 0 R9 T9 0 R8 T8 0 Figure 12-7. SPI Data Register High (SPIDRH) Module Base +0x0005 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset R7 T7 0 R6 T6 0 R5 T5 0 R4 T4 0 R3 T3 0 R2 T2 0 R1 T1 0 R0 T0 0 Figure 12-8. SPI Data Register Low (SPIDRL) Read: Anytime; read data only valid when SPIF is set Write: Anytime The SPI data register is both the input and output register for SPI data. A write to this register allows data to be queued and transmitted. For an SPI configured as a master, queued data is transmitted immediately after the previous transmission has completed. The SPI transmitter empty flag SPTEF in the SPISR register indicates when the SPI data register is ready to accept new data. Received data in the SPIDR is valid when SPIF is set. If SPIF is cleared and data has been received, the received data is transferred from the receive shift register to the SPIDR and SPIF is set. If SPIF is set and not serviced, and a second data value has been received, the second received data is kept as valid data in the receive shift register until the start of another transmission. The data in the SPIDR does not change. If SPIF is set and valid data is in the receive shift register, and SPIF is serviced before the start of a third transmission, the data in the receive shift register is transferred into the SPIDR and SPIF remains set (see Figure 12-9). If SPIF is set and valid data is in the receive shift register, and SPIF is serviced after the start of a third transmission, the data in the receive shift register has become invalid and is not transferred into the SPIDR (see Figure 12-10). S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 410 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Data A Received Data B Received Data C Received SPIF Serviced Receive Shift Register Data A Data B Data C SPIF SPI Data Register Data A Data B Data C = Unspecified = Reception in progress Figure 12-9. Reception with SPIF serviced in Time Data A Received Data B Received Data C Received Data B Lost SPIF Serviced Receive Shift Register Data A Data B Data C SPIF SPI Data Register Data A Data C = Unspecified = Reception in progress Figure 12-10. Reception with SPIF serviced too late 12.4 Functional Description The SPI module allows a duplex, synchronous, serial communication between the MCU and peripheral devices. Software can poll the SPI status flags or SPI operation can be interrupt driven. The SPI system is enabled by setting the SPI enable (SPE) bit in SPI control register 1. While SPE is set, the four associated SPI port pins are dedicated to the SPI function as: • Slave select (SS) • Serial clock (SCK) • Master out/slave in (MOSI) • Master in/slave out (MISO) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 411 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) The main element of the SPI system is the SPI data register. The n-bit1 data register in the master and the n-bit1 data register in the slave are linked by the MOSI and MISO pins to form a distributed 2n-bit1 register. When a data transfer operation is performed, this 2n-bit1 register is serially shifted n1 bit positions by the S-clock from the master, so data is exchanged between the master and the slave. Data written to the master SPI data register becomes the output data for the slave, and data read from the master SPI data register after a transfer operation is the input data from the slave. A read of SPISR with SPTEF = 1 followed by a write to SPIDR puts data into the transmit data register. When a transfer is complete and SPIF is cleared, received data is moved into the receive data register. This data register acts as the SPI receive data register for reads and as the SPI transmit data register for writes. A common SPI data register address is shared for reading data from the read data buffer and for writing data to the transmit data register. The clock phase control bit (CPHA) and a clock polarity control bit (CPOL) in the SPI control register 1 (SPICR1) select one of four possible clock formats to be used by the SPI system. The CPOL bit simply selects a non-inverted or inverted clock. The CPHA bit is used to accommodate two fundamentally different protocols by sampling data on odd numbered SCK edges or on even numbered SCK edges (see Section 12.4.3, “Transmission Formats”). The SPI can be configured to operate as a master or as a slave. When the MSTR bit in SPI control register1 is set, master mode is selected, when the MSTR bit is clear, slave mode is selected. NOTE A change of CPOL or MSTR bit while there is a received byte pending in the receive shift register will destroy the received byte and must be avoided. 12.4.1 Master Mode The SPI operates in master mode when the MSTR bit is set. Only a master SPI module can initiate transmissions. A transmission begins by writing to the master SPI data register. If the shift register is empty, data immediately transfers to the shift register. Data begins shifting out on the MOSI pin under the control of the serial clock. • Serial clock The SPR2, SPR1, and SPR0 baud rate selection bits, in conjunction with the SPPR2, SPPR1, and SPPR0 baud rate preselection bits in the SPI baud rate register, control the baud rate generator and determine the speed of the transmission. The SCK pin is the SPI clock output. Through the SCK pin, the baud rate generator of the master controls the shift register of the slave peripheral. • MOSI, MISO pin In master mode, the function of the serial data output pin (MOSI) and the serial data input pin (MISO) is determined by the SPC0 and BIDIROE control bits. • SS pin If MODFEN and SSOE are set, the SS pin is configured as slave select output. The SS output becomes low during each transmission and is high when the SPI is in idle state. If MODFEN is set and SSOE is cleared, the SS pin is configured as input for detecting mode fault error. If the SS input becomes low this indicates a mode fault error where another master tries to 1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 12.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 412 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) drive the MOSI and SCK lines. In this case, the SPI immediately switches to slave mode, by clearing the MSTR bit and also disables the slave output buffer MISO (or SISO in bidirectional mode). So the result is that all outputs are disabled and SCK, MOSI, and MISO are inputs. If a transmission is in progress when the mode fault occurs, the transmission is aborted and the SPI is forced into idle state. This mode fault error also sets the mode fault (MODF) flag in the SPI status register (SPISR). If the SPI interrupt enable bit (SPIE) is set when the MODF flag becomes set, then an SPI interrupt sequence is also requested. When a write to the SPI data register in the master occurs, there is a half SCK-cycle delay. After the delay, SCK is started within the master. The rest of the transfer operation differs slightly, depending on the clock format specified by the SPI clock phase bit, CPHA, in SPI control register 1 (see Section 12.4.3, “Transmission Formats”). NOTE A change of the bits CPOL, CPHA, SSOE, LSBFE, XFRW, MODFEN, SPC0, or BIDIROE with SPC0 set, SPPR2-SPPR0 and SPR2-SPR0 in master mode will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI into idle state. The remote slave cannot detect this, therefore the master must ensure that the remote slave is returned to idle state. 12.4.2 Slave Mode The SPI operates in slave mode when the MSTR bit in SPI control register 1 is clear. • Serial clock In slave mode, SCK is the SPI clock input from the master. • MISO, MOSI pin In slave mode, the function of the serial data output pin (MISO) and serial data input pin (MOSI) is determined by the SPC0 bit and BIDIROE bit in SPI control register 2. • SS pin The SS pin is the slave select input. Before a data transmission occurs, the SS pin of the slave SPI must be low. SS must remain low until the transmission is complete. If SS goes high, the SPI is forced into idle state. The SS input also controls the serial data output pin, if SS is high (not selected), the serial data output pin is high impedance, and, if SS is low, the first bit in the SPI data register is driven out of the serial data output pin. Also, if the slave is not selected (SS is high), then the SCK input is ignored and no internal shifting of the SPI shift register occurs. Although the SPI is capable of duplex operation, some SPI peripherals are capable of only receiving SPI data in a slave mode. For these simpler devices, there is no serial data out pin. NOTE When peripherals with duplex capability are used, take care not to simultaneously enable two receivers whose serial outputs drive the same system slave’s serial data output line. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 413 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) As long as no more than one slave device drives the system slave’s serial data output line, it is possible for several slaves to receive the same transmission from a master, although the master would not receive return information from all of the receiving slaves. If the CPHA bit in SPI control register 1 is clear, odd numbered edges on the SCK input cause the data at the serial data input pin to be latched. Even numbered edges cause the value previously latched from the serial data input pin to shift into the LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register, depending on the LSBFE bit. If the CPHA bit is set, even numbered edges on the SCK input cause the data at the serial data input pin to be latched. Odd numbered edges cause the value previously latched from the serial data input pin to shift into the LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register, depending on the LSBFE bit. When CPHA is set, the first edge is used to get the first data bit onto the serial data output pin. When CPHA is clear and the SS input is low (slave selected), the first bit of the SPI data is driven out of the serial data output pin. After the nth1 shift, the transfer is considered complete and the received data is transferred into the SPI data register. To indicate transfer is complete, the SPIF flag in the SPI status register is set. NOTE A change of the bits CPOL, CPHA, SSOE, LSBFE, MODFEN, SPC0, or BIDIROE with SPC0 set in slave mode will corrupt a transmission in progress and must be avoided. 12.4.3 Transmission Formats During an SPI transmission, data is transmitted (shifted out serially) and received (shifted in serially) simultaneously. The serial clock (SCK) synchronizes shifting and sampling of the information on the two serial data lines. A slave select line allows selection of an individual slave SPI device; slave devices that are not selected do not interfere with SPI bus activities. Optionally, on a master SPI device, the slave select line can be used to indicate multiple-master bus contention. MASTER SPI MISO MOSI SCK BAUD RATE GENERATOR SS MISO MOSI SCK SS SLAVE SPI SHIFT REGISTER SHIFT REGISTER VDD Figure 12-11. Master/Slave Transfer Block Diagram 12.4.3.1 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls Using two bits in the SPI control register 1, software selects one of four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity. 1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 12.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 414 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) The CPOL clock polarity control bit specifies an active high or low clock and has no significant effect on the transmission format. The CPHA clock phase control bit selects one of two fundamentally different transmission formats. Clock phase and polarity should be identical for the master SPI device and the communicating slave device. In some cases, the phase and polarity are changed between transmissions to allow a master device to communicate with peripheral slaves having different requirements. 12.4.3.2 CPHA = 0 Transfer Format The first edge on the SCK line is used to clock the first data bit of the slave into the master and the first data bit of the master into the slave. In some peripherals, the first bit of the slave’s data is available at the slave’s data out pin as soon as the slave is selected. In this format, the first SCK edge is issued a half cycle after SS has become low. A half SCK cycle later, the second edge appears on the SCK line. When this second edge occurs, the value previously latched from the serial data input pin is shifted into the LSB or MSB of the shift register, depending on LSBFE bit. After this second edge, the next bit of the SPI master data is transmitted out of the serial data output pin of the master to the serial input pin on the slave. This process continues for a total of 16 edges on the SCK line, with data being latched on odd numbered edges and shifted on even numbered edges. Data reception is double buffered. Data is shifted serially into the SPI shift register during the transfer and is transferred to the parallel SPI data register after the last bit is shifted in. After 2n1 (last) SCK edges: • Data that was previously in the master SPI data register should now be in the slave data register and the data that was in the slave data register should be in the master. • The SPIF flag in the SPI status register is set, indicating that the transfer is complete. Figure 12-12 is a timing diagram of an SPI transfer where CPHA = 0. SCK waveforms are shown for CPOL = 0 and CPOL = 1. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram because the SCK, MISO, and MOSI pins are connected directly between the master and the slave. The MISO signal is the output from the slave and the MOSI signal is the output from the master. The SS pin of the master must be either high or reconfigured as a general-purpose output not affecting the SPI. 1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 12.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 415 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) End of Idle State SCK Edge Number SCK (CPOL = 0) SCK (CPOL = 1) 1 2 Begin 3 4 5 6 Transfer 7 8 9 10 11 12 End 13 14 15 16 Begin of Idle State CHANGE O MOSI pin CHANGE O MISO pin SEL SS (O) Master only SEL SS (I) tL tT Bit 1 Bit 6 tI tL MSB first (LSBFE = 0): MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 LSB first (LSBFE = 1): LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time) tL, tT, and tI are guaranteed for the master mode and required for the slave mode. LSB Minimum 1/2 SCK for tT, tl, tL MSB Figure 12-12. SPI Clock Format 0 (CPHA = 0), with 8-bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 0) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 416 Freescale Semiconductor If next transfer begins here SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) End of Idle State SCK Edge Number SCK (CPOL = 0) SCK (CPOL = 1) 1 2 3 4 Begin 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Transfer 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 End 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Begin of Idle State CHANGE O MOSI pin CHANGE O MISO pin SEL SS (O) Master only SEL SS (I) MSB first (LSBFE = 0) LSB first (LSBFE = 1) tL tT tI tL MSB Bit 14Bit 13Bit 12Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB Minimum 1/2 SCK LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10Bit 11 Bit 12Bit 13Bit 14 MSB for tT, tl, tL tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time) tL, tT, and tI are guaranteed for the master mode and required for the slave mode. Figure 12-13. SPI Clock Format 0 (CPHA = 0), with 16-Bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 1) In slave mode, if the SS line is not deasserted between the successive transmissions then the content of the SPI data register is not transmitted; instead the last received data is transmitted. If the SS line is deasserted for at least minimum idle time (half SCK cycle) between successive transmissions, then the content of the SPI data register is transmitted. In master mode, with slave select output enabled the SS line is always deasserted and reasserted between successive transfers for at least minimum idle time. 12.4.3.3 CPHA = 1 Transfer Format Some peripherals require the first SCK edge before the first data bit becomes available at the data out pin, the second edge clocks data into the system. In this format, the first SCK edge is issued by setting the CPHA bit at the beginning of the n1-cycle transfer operation. The first edge of SCK occurs immediately after the half SCK clock cycle synchronization delay. This first edge commands the slave to transfer its first data bit to the serial data input pin of the master. A half SCK cycle later, the second edge appears on the SCK pin. This is the latching edge for both the master and slave. 1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 12.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 417 If next transfer begins here SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) When the third edge occurs, the value previously latched from the serial data input pin is shifted into the LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register, depending on LSBFE bit. After this edge, the next bit of the master data is coupled out of the serial data output pin of the master to the serial input pin on the slave. This process continues for a total of n1 edges on the SCK line with data being latched on even numbered edges and shifting taking place on odd numbered edges. Data reception is double buffered, data is serially shifted into the SPI shift register during the transfer and is transferred to the parallel SPI data register after the last bit is shifted in. After 2n1 SCK edges: • Data that was previously in the SPI data register of the master is now in the data register of the slave, and data that was in the data register of the slave is in the master. • The SPIF flag bit in SPISR is set indicating that the transfer is complete. Figure 12-14 shows two clocking variations for CPHA = 1. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram because the SCK, MISO, and MOSI pins are connected directly between the master and the slave. The MISO signal is the output from the slave, and the MOSI signal is the output from the master. The SS line is the slave select input to the slave. The SS pin of the master must be either high or reconfigured as a general-purpose output not affecting the SPI. End of Idle State SCK Edge Number SCK (CPOL = 0) SCK (CPOL = 1) 1 2 3 Begin 4 5 6 7 Transfer 8 9 10 11 12 End 13 14 15 16 Begin of Idle State CHANGE O MOSI pin CHANGE O MISO pin SEL SS (O) Master only SEL SS (I) tL tT tI tL MSB first (LSBFE = 0): LSB first (LSBFE = 1): MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB Minimum 1/2 SCK for tT, tl, tL LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge, not required for back-to-back transfers tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time), not required for back-to-back transfers Figure 12-14. SPI Clock Format 1 (CPHA = 1), with 8-Bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 0) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 418 Freescale Semiconductor If next transfer begins here SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) End of Idle State SCK Edge Number SCK (CPOL = 0) SCK (CPOL = 1) 1 2 3 4 Begin 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Transfer 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 End 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Begin of Idle State CHANGE O MOSI pin CHANGE O MISO pin SEL SS (O) Master only SEL SS (I) tL MSB first (LSBFE = 0) LSB first (LSBFE = 1) MSB Bit 14Bit 13Bit 12Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10Bit 11 Bit 12Bit 13Bit 14 MSB tT tI tL Minimum 1/2 SCK for tT, tl, tL tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge, not required for back-to-back transfers tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time), not required for back-to-back transfers Figure 12-15. SPI Clock Format 1 (CPHA = 1), with 16-Bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 1) The SS line can remain active low between successive transfers (can be tied low at all times). This format is sometimes preferred in systems having a single fixed master and a single slave that drive the MISO data line. • Back-to-back transfers in master mode In master mode, if a transmission has completed and new data is available in the SPI data register, this data is sent out immediately without a trailing and minimum idle time. The SPI interrupt request flag (SPIF) is common to both the master and slave modes. SPIF gets set one half SCK cycle after the last SCK edge. 12.4.4 SPI Baud Rate Generation Baud rate generation consists of a series of divider stages. Six bits in the SPI baud rate register (SPPR2, SPPR1, SPPR0, SPR2, SPR1, and SPR0) determine the divisor to the SPI module clock which results in the SPI baud rate. The SPI clock rate is determined by the product of the value in the baud rate preselection bits (SPPR2–SPPR0) and the value in the baud rate selection bits (SPR2–SPR0). The module clock divisor equation is shown in Equation 12-3. BaudRateDivisor = (SPPR + 1) • 2(SPR + 1) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 419 If next transfer begins here SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO Eqn. 12-3 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) When all bits are clear (the default condition), the SPI module clock is divided by 2. When the selection bits (SPR2–SPR0) are 001 and the preselection bits (SPPR2–SPPR0) are 000, the module clock divisor becomes 4. When the selection bits are 010, the module clock divisor becomes 8, etc. When the preselection bits are 001, the divisor determined by the selection bits is multiplied by 2. When the preselection bits are 010, the divisor is multiplied by 3, etc. See Table 12-7 for baud rate calculations for all bit conditions, based on a 25 MHz bus clock. The two sets of selects allows the clock to be divided by a non-power of two to achieve other baud rates such as divide by 6, divide by 10, etc. The baud rate generator is activated only when the SPI is in master mode and a serial transfer is taking place. In the other cases, the divider is disabled to decrease IDD current. NOTE For maximum allowed baud rates, please refer to the SPI Electrical Specification in the Electricals chapter of this data sheet. 12.4.5 12.4.5.1 Special Features SS Output The SS output feature automatically drives the SS pin low during transmission to select external devices and drives it high during idle to deselect external devices. When SS output is selected, the SS output pin is connected to the SS input pin of the external device. The SS output is available only in master mode during normal SPI operation by asserting SSOE and MODFEN bit as shown in Table 12-3. The mode fault feature is disabled while SS output is enabled. NOTE Care must be taken when using the SS output feature in a multimaster system because the mode fault feature is not available for detecting system errors between masters. 12.4.5.2 Bidirectional Mode (MOMI or SISO) The bidirectional mode is selected when the SPC0 bit is set in SPI control register 2 (see Table 12-11). In this mode, the SPI uses only one serial data pin for the interface with external device(s). The MSTR bit decides which pin to use. The MOSI pin becomes the serial data I/O (MOMI) pin for the master mode, and the MISO pin becomes serial data I/O (SISO) pin for the slave mode. The MISO pin in master mode and MOSI pin in slave mode are not used by the SPI. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 420 Freescale Semiconductor Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) Table 12-11. Normal Mode and Bidirectional Mode When SPE = 1 Master Mode MSTR = 1 Slave Mode MSTR = 0 Serial Out MOSI Serial In SPI MOSI Normal Mode SPC0 = 0 SPI Serial In MISO Serial Out MISO Serial Out MOMI BIDIROE Serial In BIDIROE SPI Serial Out SISO Bidirectional Mode SPC0 = 1 SPI Serial In The direction of each serial I/O pin depends on the BIDIROE bit. If the pin is configured as an output, serial data from the shift register is driven out on the pin. The same pin is also the serial input to the shift register. • The SCK is output for the master mode and input for the slave mode. • The SS is the input or output for the master mode, and it is always the input for the slave mode. • The bidirectional mode does not affect SCK and SS functions. NOTE In bidirectional master mode, with mode fault enabled, both data pins MISO and MOSI can be occupied by the SPI, though MOSI is normally used for transmissions in bidirectional mode and MISO is not used by the SPI. If a mode fault occurs, the SPI is automatically switched to slave mode. In this case MISO becomes occupied by the SPI and MOSI is not used. This must be considered, if the MISO pin is used for another purpose. 12.4.6 Error Conditions The SPI has one error condition: • Mode fault error 12.4.6.1 Mode Fault Error If the SS input becomes low while the SPI is configured as a master, it indicates a system error where more than one master may be trying to drive the MOSI and SCK lines simultaneously. This condition is not permitted in normal operation, the MODF bit in the SPI status register is set automatically, provided the MODFEN bit is set. In the special case where the SPI is in master mode and MODFEN bit is cleared, the SS pin is not used by the SPI. In this special case, the mode fault error function is inhibited and MODF remains cleared. In case S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 421 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) the SPI system is configured as a slave, the SS pin is a dedicated input pin. Mode fault error doesn’t occur in slave mode. If a mode fault error occurs, the SPI is switched to slave mode, with the exception that the slave output buffer is disabled. So SCK, MISO, and MOSI pins are forced to be high impedance inputs to avoid any possibility of conflict with another output driver. A transmission in progress is aborted and the SPI is forced into idle state. If the mode fault error occurs in the bidirectional mode for a SPI system configured in master mode, output enable of the MOMI (MOSI in bidirectional mode) is cleared if it was set. No mode fault error occurs in the bidirectional mode for SPI system configured in slave mode. The mode fault flag is cleared automatically by a read of the SPI status register (with MODF set) followed by a write to SPI control register 1. If the mode fault flag is cleared, the SPI becomes a normal master or slave again. NOTE If a mode fault error occurs and a received data byte is pending in the receive shift register, this data byte will be lost. 12.4.7 12.4.7.1 Low Power Mode Options SPI in Run Mode In run mode with the SPI system enable (SPE) bit in the SPI control register clear, the SPI system is in a low-power, disabled state. SPI registers remain accessible, but clocks to the core of this module are disabled. 12.4.7.2 SPI in Wait Mode SPI operation in wait mode depends upon the state of the SPISWAI bit in SPI control register 2. • If SPISWAI is clear, the SPI operates normally when the CPU is in wait mode • If SPISWAI is set, SPI clock generation ceases and the SPI module enters a power conservation state when the CPU is in wait mode. – If SPISWAI is set and the SPI is configured for master, any transmission and reception in progress stops at wait mode entry. The transmission and reception resumes when the SPI exits wait mode. If SPISWAI is set and the SPI is configured as a slave, any transmission and reception in progress continues if the SCK continues to be driven from the master. This keeps the slave synchronized to the master and the SCK. If the master transmits several bytes while the slave is in wait mode, the slave will continue to send out bytes consistent with the operation mode at the start of wait mode (i.e., if the slave is currently sending its SPIDR to the master, it will continue to send the same byte. Else if the slave is currently sending the last received byte from the master, it will continue to send each previous master byte). S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 422 Freescale Semiconductor – Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) NOTE Care must be taken when expecting data from a master while the slave is in wait or stop mode. Even though the shift register will continue to operate, the rest of the SPI is shut down (i.e., a SPIF interrupt will not be generated until exiting stop or wait mode). Also, the byte from the shift register will not be copied into the SPIDR register until after the slave SPI has exited wait or stop mode. In slave mode, a received byte pending in the receive shift register will be lost when entering wait or stop mode. An SPIF flag and SPIDR copy is generated only if wait mode is entered or exited during a tranmission. If the slave enters wait mode in idle mode and exits wait mode in idle mode, neither a SPIF nor a SPIDR copy will occur. 12.4.7.3 SPI in Stop Mode Stop mode is dependent on the system. The SPI enters stop mode when the module clock is disabled (held high or low). If the SPI is in master mode and exchanging data when the CPU enters stop mode, the transmission is frozen until the CPU exits stop mode. After stop, data to and from the external SPI is exchanged correctly. In slave mode, the SPI will stay synchronized with the master. The stop mode is not dependent on the SPISWAI bit. 12.4.7.4 Reset The reset values of registers and signals are described in Section 12.3, “Memory Map and Register Definition”, which details the registers and their bit fields. • If a data transmission occurs in slave mode after reset without a write to SPIDR, it will transmit garbage, or the data last received from the master before the reset. • Reading from the SPIDR after reset will always read zeros. 12.4.7.5 Interrupts The SPI only originates interrupt requests when SPI is enabled (SPE bit in SPICR1 set). The following is a description of how the SPI makes a request and how the MCU should acknowledge that request. The interrupt vector offset and interrupt priority are chip dependent. The interrupt flags MODF, SPIF, and SPTEF are logically ORed to generate an interrupt request. 12.4.7.5.1 MODF MODF occurs when the master detects an error on the SS pin. The master SPI must be configured for the MODF feature (see Table 12-3). After MODF is set, the current transfer is aborted and the following bit is changed: • MSTR = 0, The master bit in SPICR1 resets. The MODF interrupt is reflected in the status register MODF flag. Clearing the flag will also clear the interrupt. This interrupt will stay active while the MODF flag is set. MODF has an automatic clearing process which is described in Section 12.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR)”. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 423 Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) 12.4.7.5.2 SPIF SPIF occurs when new data has been received and copied to the SPI data register. After SPIF is set, it does not clear until it is serviced. SPIF has an automatic clearing process, which is described in Section 12.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR)”. 12.4.7.5.3 SPTEF SPTEF occurs when the SPI data register is ready to accept new data. After SPTEF is set, it does not clear until it is serviced. SPTEF has an automatic clearing process, which is described in Section 12.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR)”. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 424 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 13 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-1. Revision History Revision Number V01.09 V01.10 Revision Date 28 Jul 2008 19 Dec 2008 Sections Affected 13.1.1/13-426 13.3.1/13-429 13.1/13-425 13.4.5.4/13-457 13.4.5.6/13-459 13.4.5.11/13463 13.4.5.11/13463 13.4.5.11/13463 13.5.2/13-471 Description of Changes - Remove reference to IFRON in Program IFR definition - Remove reference to IFRON in Table 13-4 and Figure 13-3 - Clarify single bit fault correction for P-Flash phrase - Add statement concerning code runaway when executing Read Once, Program Once, and Verify Backdoor Access Key commands from Flash block containing associated fields - Relate Key 0 to associated Backdoor Comparison Key address - Change “power down reset” to “reset” - Reformat section on unsecuring MCU using BDM V01.11 25 Sep 2009 -The following changes were made to clarify module behavior related to Flash register access during reset sequence and while Flash commands are active: 13.3.2/13-432 - Add caution concerning register writes while command is active 13.3.2.1/13-433 - Writes to FCLKDIV are allowed during reset sequence while CCIF is clear 13.4.3.2/13-451 - Add caution concerning register writes while command is active - Writes to FCCOBIX, FCCOBHI, FCCOBLO registers are ignored during 13.6/13-472 reset sequence 13.1 Introduction The FTMRC128K1 module implements the following: • 128 Kbytes of P-Flash (Program Flash) memory • 4 Kbytes of D-Flash (Data Flash) memory The Flash memory is ideal for single-supply applications allowing for field reprogramming without requiring external high voltage sources for program or erase operations. The Flash module includes a memory controller that executes commands to modify Flash memory contents. The user interface to the memory controller consists of the indexed Flash Common Command Object (FCCOB) register which is written to with the command, global address, data, and any required command parameters. The memory controller must complete the execution of a command before the FCCOB register can be written to with a new command. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 425 CAUTION A Flash word or phrase must be in the erased state before being programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash word or phrase is not allowed. The Flash memory may be read as bytes, aligned words, or misaligned words. Read access time is one bus cycle for bytes and aligned words, and two bus cycles for misaligned words. For Flash memory, an erased bit reads 1 and a programmed bit reads 0. It is possible to read from P-Flash memory while some commands are executing on D-Flash memory. It is not possible to read from D-Flash memory while a command is executing on P-Flash memory. Simultaneous P-Flash and D-Flash operations are discussed in Section 13.4.4. Both P-Flash and D-Flash memories are implemented with Error Correction Codes (ECC) that can resolve single bit faults and detect double bit faults. For P-Flash memory, the ECC implementation requires that programming be done on an aligned 8 byte basis (a Flash phrase). Since P-Flash memory is always read by half-phrase, only one single bit fault in an aligned 4 byte half-phrase containing the byte or word accessed will be corrected. 13.1.1 Glossary Command Write Sequence — An MCU instruction sequence to execute built-in algorithms (including program and erase) on the Flash memory. D-Flash Memory — The D-Flash memory constitutes the nonvolatile memory store for data. D-Flash Sector — The D-Flash sector is the smallest portion of the D-Flash memory that can be erased. The D-Flash sector consists of four 64 byte rows for a total of 256 bytes. NVM Command Mode — An NVM mode using the CPU to setup the FCCOB register to pass parameters required for Flash command execution. Phrase — An aligned group of four 16-bit words within the P-Flash memory. Each phrase includes two sets of aligned double words with each set including 7 ECC bits for single bit fault correction and double bit fault detection within each double word. P-Flash Memory — The P-Flash memory constitutes the main nonvolatile memory store for applications. P-Flash Sector — The P-Flash sector is the smallest portion of the P-Flash memory that can be erased. Each P-Flash sector contains 512 bytes. Program IFR — Nonvolatile information register located in the P-Flash block that contains the Device ID, Version ID, and the Program Once field. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 426 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 13.1.2 13.1.2.1 • • • • • • Features P-Flash Features 128 Kbytes of P-Flash memory composed of one 128 Kbyte Flash block divided into 256 sectors of 512 bytes Single bit fault correction and double bit fault detection within a 32-bit double word during read operations Automated program and erase algorithm with verify and generation of ECC parity bits Fast sector erase and phrase program operation Ability to read the P-Flash memory while programming a word in the D-Flash memory Flexible protection scheme to prevent accidental program or erase of P-Flash memory 13.1.2.2 • • • • • • D-Flash Features 4 Kbytes of D-Flash memory composed of one 4 Kbyte Flash block divided into 16 sectors of 256 bytes Single bit fault correction and double bit fault detection within a word during read operations Automated program and erase algorithm with verify and generation of ECC parity bits Fast sector erase and word program operation Protection scheme to prevent accidental program or erase of D-Flash memory Ability to program up to four words in a burst sequence 13.1.2.3 • • • Other Flash Module Features No external high-voltage power supply required for Flash memory program and erase operations Interrupt generation on Flash command completion and Flash error detection Security mechanism to prevent unauthorized access to the Flash memory 13.1.3 Block Diagram The block diagram of the Flash module is shown in Figure 13-1. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 427 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Flash Interface Command Interrupt Request Error Interrupt Request Registers 16bit internal bus P-Flash 32Kx39 sector 0 sector 1 sector 255 Protection Security Bus Clock Clock Divider FCLK Memory Controller D-Flash 2Kx22 sector 0 sector 1 sector 15 CPU Scratch RAM 384x16 Figure 13-1. FTMRC128K1 Block Diagram 13.2 External Signal Description The Flash module contains no signals that connect off-chip. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 428 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 13.3 Memory Map and Registers This section describes the memory map and registers for the Flash module. Read data from unimplemented memory space in the Flash module is undefined. Write access to unimplemented or reserved memory space in the Flash module will be ignored by the Flash module. 13.3.1 Module Memory Map The S12 architecture places the P-Flash memory between global addresses 0x2_0000 and 0x3_FFFF as shown in Table 13-2.The P-Flash memory map is shown in Figure 13-2. Table 13-2. P-Flash Memory Addressing Global Address Size (Bytes) 128 K Description P-Flash Block Contains Flash Configuration Field (see Table 13-3) 0x2_0000 – 0x3_FFFF The FPROT register, described in Section 13.3.2.9, can be set to protect regions in the Flash memory from accidental program or erase. Three separate memory regions, one growing upward from global address 0x3_8000 in the Flash memory (called the lower region), one growing downward from global address 0x3_FFFF in the Flash memory (called the higher region), and the remaining addresses in the Flash memory, can be activated for protection. The Flash memory addresses covered by these protectable regions are shown in the P-Flash memory map. The higher address region is mainly targeted to hold the boot loader code since it covers the vector space. Default protection settings as well as security information that allows the MCU to restrict access to the Flash module are stored in the Flash configuration field as described in Table 13-3. Table 13-3. Flash Configuration Field Global Address Size (Bytes) 8 4 1 1 1 1 Description Backdoor Comparison Key Refer to Section 13.4.5.11, “Verify Backdoor Access Key Command,” and Section 13.5.1, “Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access” Reserved P-Flash Protection byte. Refer to Section 13.3.2.9, “P-Flash Protection Register (FPROT)” D-Flash Protection byte. Refer to Section 13.3.2.10, “D-Flash Protection Register (DFPROT)” Flash Nonvolatile byte Refer to Section 13.3.2.16, “Flash Option Register (FOPT)” 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07 0x3_FF08-0x3_FF0B(1) 0x3_FF0C1 0x3_FF0D1 0x3_FF0E1 0x3_FF0F1 Flash Security byte Refer to Section 13.3.2.2, “Flash Security Register (FSEC)” 1. 0x3FF08-0x3_FF0F form a Flash phrase and must be programmed in a single command write sequence. Each byte in the 0x3_FF08 - 0x3_FF0B reserved field should be programmed to 0xFF. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 429 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) P-Flash START = 0x2_0000 Flash Protected/Unprotected Region 96 Kbytes 0x3_8000 0x3_8400 0x3_8800 0x3_9000 Protection Fixed End 0x3_A000 Flash Protected/Unprotected Lower Region 1, 2, 4, 8 Kbytes Protection Movable End 0x3_C000 Protection Fixed End Flash Protected/Unprotected Region 8 Kbytes (up to 29 Kbytes) 0x3_E000 Flash Protected/Unprotected Higher Region 2, 4, 8, 16 Kbytes 0x3_F000 0x3_F800 P-Flash END = 0x3_FFFF Flash Configuration Field 16 bytes (0x3_FF00 - 0x3_FF0F) Figure 13-2. P-Flash Memory Map Table 13-4. Program IFR Fields Global Address 0x0_4000 – 0x0_4007 0x0_4008 – 0x0_40B5 0x0_40B6 – 0x0_40B7 Size (Bytes) 8 174 2 Reserved Reserved Version ID(1) Field Description S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 430 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-4. Program IFR Fields Global Address 0x0_40B8 – 0x0_40BF 0x0_40C0 – 0x0_40FF Size (Bytes) 8 64 Reserved Field Description Program Once Field Refer to Section 13.4.5.6, “Program Once Command” 1. Used to track firmware patch versions, see Section 13.4.2 Table 13-5. D-Flash and Memory Controller Resource Fields Global Address 0x0_4000 – 0x0_43FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_53FF 0x0_5400 – 0x0_57FF 0x0_5800 – 0x0_5AFF 0x0_5B00 – 0x0_5FFF 0x0_6000 – 0x0_67FF 0x0_6800 – 0x0_7FFF 1. MMCCTL1 register bit Size (Bytes) 1,024 4,096 1,024 768 1,280 2,048 6,144 Reserved D-Flash Memory Reserved Memory Controller Scratch RAM (RAMON(1) = 1) Reserved Reserved Reserved Description 0x0_4000 0x0_40FF D-Flash Start = 0x0_4400 P-Flash IFR 1 Kbyte D-Flash Memory 4 Kbytes D-Flash End = 0x0_53FF Reserved 1 Kbyte RAM Start = 0x0_5800 RAM End = 0x0_5AFF 0x0_6000 0x0_6800 Reserved 6 Kbytes Scratch Ram 768 bytes (RAMON) Reserved 1280 bytes Reserved 2 Kbytes 0x0_7FFF Figure 13-3. D-Flash and Memory Controller Resource Memory Map S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 431 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 13.3.2 Register Descriptions The Flash module contains a set of 20 control and status registers located between Flash module base + 0x0000 and 0x0013. A summary of the Flash module registers is given in Figure 13-4 with detailed descriptions in the following subsections. CAUTION Writes to any Flash register must be avoided while a Flash command is active (CCIF=0) to prevent corruption of Flash register contents and adversely affect Memory Controller behavior. Address & Name 0x0000 FCLKDIV 0x0001 FSEC 0x0002 FCCOBIX 0x0003 FRSV0 0x0004 FCNFG 0x0005 FERCNFG 0x0006 FSTAT 0x0007 FERSTAT 0x0008 FPROT 0x0009 DFPROT R W R W R W R W R CCIE W R W R CCIF W R W R FPOPEN W R DPOPEN W 0 0 0 DPS3 DPS2 DPS1 DPS0 RNV6 FPHDIS FPHS1 FPHS0 FPLDIS FPLS1 FPLS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DFDIF SFDIF 0 ACCERR FPVIOL MGBUSY RSVD MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DFDIE SFDIE 0 0 IGNSF 0 0 FDFD FSFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCOBIX2 CCOBIX1 CCOBIX0 KEYEN1 KEYEN0 RNV5 RNV4 RNV3 RNV2 SEC1 SEC0 7 FDIVLD FDIVLCK FDIV5 FDIV4 FDIV3 FDIV2 FDIV1 FDIV0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Figure 13-4. FTMRC128K1 Register Summary S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 432 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Address & Name 0x000A FCCOBHI 0x000B FCCOBLO 0x000C FRSV1 0x000D FRSV2 0x000E FRSV3 0x000F FRSV4 0x0010 FOPT 0x0011 FRSV5 0x0012 FRSV6 0x0013 FRSV7 R 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CCOB15 W R CCOB7 W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W 0 0 0 NV7 0 0 0 0 CCOB14 CCOB13 CCOB12 CCOB11 CCOB10 CCOB9 CCOB8 CCOB6 CCOB5 CCOB4 CCOB3 CCOB2 CCOB1 CCOB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NV6 NV5 NV4 NV3 NV2 NV1 NV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-4. FTMRC128K1 Register Summary (continued) 13.3.2.1 Flash Clock Divider Register (FCLKDIV) The FCLKDIV register is used to control timed events in program and erase algorithms. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 433 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Offset Module Base + 0x0000 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset FDIVLD FDIVLCK 0 0 0 0 0 FDIV[5:0] 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-5. Flash Clock Divider Register (FCLKDIV) All bits in the FCLKDIV register are readable, bit 7 is not writable, bit 6 is write-once-hi and controls the writability of the FDIV field. CAUTION The FCLKDIV register must never be written to while a Flash command is executing (CCIF=0). The FCLKDIV register is writable during the Flash reset sequence even though CCIF is clear. Table 13-6. FCLKDIV Field Descriptions Field 7 FDIVLD 6 FDIVLCK Description Clock Divider Loaded 0 FCLKDIV register has not been written since the last reset 1 FCLKDIV register has been written since the last reset Clock Divider Locked 0 FDIV field is open for writing 1 FDIV value is locked and cannot be changed. Once the lock bit is set high, only reset can clear this bit and restore writability to the FDIV field. Clock Divider Bits — FDIV[5:0] must be set to effectively divide BUSCLK down to 1 MHz to control timed events during Flash program and erase algorithms. Table 13-7 shows recommended values for FDIV[5:0] based on the BUSCLK frequency. Please refer to Section 13.4.3, “Flash Command Operations,” for more information. 5–0 FDIV[5:0] S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 434 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-7. FDIV values for various BUSCLK Frequencies BUSCLK Frequency (MHz) MIN(1) 1.0 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.6 12.6 13.6 14.6 MAX(2) 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.6 12.6 13.6 14.6 15.6 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E BUSCLK Frequency (MHz) MIN 1 FDIV[5:0] FDIV[5:0] MAX 2 16.6 17.6 18.6 19.6 20.6 21.6 22.6 23.6 24.6 25.6 26.6 27.6 28.6 29.6 30.6 31.6 17.6 18.6 19.6 20.6 21.6 22.6 23.6 24.6 25.6 26.6 27.6 28.6 29.6 30.6 31.6 32.6 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F 15.6 16.6 0x0F 1. BUSCLK is Greater Than this value. 2. BUSCLK is Less Than or Equal to this value. 13.3.2.2 Flash Security Register (FSEC) The FSEC register holds all bits associated with the security of the MCU and Flash module. Offset Module Base + 0x0001 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset F KEYEN[1:0] RNV[5:2] SEC[1:0] F F F F F F F = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-6. Flash Security Register (FSEC) All bits in the FSEC register are readable but not writable. During the reset sequence, the FSEC register is loaded with the contents of the Flash security byte in the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0F located in P-Flash memory (see Table 13-3) as indicated by reset condition F in Figure 13-6. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the P-Flash S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 435 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) phrase containing the Flash security byte during the reset sequence, all bits in the FSEC register will be set to leave the Flash module in a secured state with backdoor key access disabled. Table 13-8. FSEC Field Descriptions Field Description 7–6 Backdoor Key Security Enable Bits — The KEYEN[1:0] bits define the enabling of backdoor key access to the KEYEN[1:0] Flash module as shown in Table 13-9. 5–2 RNV[5:2} 1–0 SEC[1:0] Reserved Nonvolatile Bits — The RNV bits should remain in the erased state for future enhancements. Flash Security Bits — The SEC[1:0] bits define the security state of the MCU as shown in Table 13-10. If the Flash module is unsecured using backdoor key access, the SEC bits are forced to 10. Table 13-9. Flash KEYEN States KEYEN[1:0] 00 01 10 Status of Backdoor Key Access DISABLED DISABLED(1) ENABLED 11 DISABLED 1. Preferred KEYEN state to disable backdoor key access. Table 13-10. Flash Security States SEC[1:0] 00 01 10 Status of Security SECURED SECURED(1) UNSECURED 11 SECURED 1. Preferred SEC state to set MCU to secured state. The security function in the Flash module is described in Section 13.5. 13.3.2.3 Flash CCOB Index Register (FCCOBIX) The FCCOBIX register is used to index the FCCOB register for Flash memory operations. Offset Module Base + 0x0002 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 CCOBIX[2:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-7. FCCOB Index Register (FCCOBIX) CCOBIX bits are readable and writable while remaining bits read 0 and are not writable. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 436 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-11. FCCOBIX Field Descriptions Field 2–0 CCOBIX[1:0] Description Common Command Register Index— The CCOBIX bits are used to select which word of the FCCOB register array is being read or written to. See Section 13.3.2.11, “Flash Common Command Object Register (FCCOB),” for more details. 13.3.2.4 Flash Reserved0 Register (FRSV0) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. Offset Module Base + 0x000C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-8. Flash Reserved0 Register (FRSV0) All bits in the FRSV0 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.5 Flash Configuration Register (FCNFG) The FCNFG register enables the Flash command complete interrupt and forces ECC faults on Flash array read access from the CPU. Offset Module Base + 0x0004 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R CCIE W Reset 0 0 0 IGNSF 0 0 FDFD FSFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-9. Flash Configuration Register (FCNFG) CCIE, IGNSF, FDFD, and FSFD bits are readable and writable while remaining bits read 0 and are not writable. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 437 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-12. FCNFG Field Descriptions Field 7 CCIE Description Command Complete Interrupt Enable — The CCIE bit controls interrupt generation when a Flash command has completed. 0 Command complete interrupt disabled 1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the CCIF flag in the FSTAT register is set (see Section 13.3.2.7) Ignore Single Bit Fault — The IGNSF controls single bit fault reporting in the FERSTAT register (see Section 13.3.2.8). 0 All single bit faults detected during array reads are reported 1 Single bit faults detected during array reads are not reported and the single bit fault interrupt will not be generated Force Double Bit Fault Detect — The FDFD bit allows the user to simulate a double bit fault during Flash array read operations and check the associated interrupt routine. The FDFD bit is cleared by writing a 0 to FDFD. The FECCR registers will not be updated during the Flash array read operation with FDFD set unless an actual double bit fault is detected. 0 Flash array read operations will set the DFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register only if a double bit fault is detected 1 Any Flash array read operation will force the DFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register to be set (see Section 13.3.2.7) and an interrupt will be generated as long as the DFDIE interrupt enable in the FERCNFG register is set (see Section 13.3.2.6) Force Single Bit Fault Detect — The FSFD bit allows the user to simulate a single bit fault during Flash array read operations and check the associated interrupt routine. The FSFD bit is cleared by writing a 0 to FSFD. The FECCR registers will not be updated during the Flash array read operation with FSFD set unless an actual single bit fault is detected. 0 Flash array read operations will set the SFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register only if a single bit fault is detected 1 Flash array read operation will force the SFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register to be set (see Section 13.3.2.7) and an interrupt will be generated as long as the SFDIE interrupt enable in the FERCNFG register is set (see Section 13.3.2.6) 4 IGNSF 1 FDFD 0 FSFD 13.3.2.6 Flash Error Configuration Register (FERCNFG) The FERCNFG register enables the Flash error interrupts for the FERSTAT flags. Offset Module Base + 0x0005 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 DFDIE SFDIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-10. Flash Error Configuration Register (FERCNFG) All assigned bits in the FERCNFG register are readable and writable. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 438 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-13. FERCNFG Field Descriptions Field 1 DFDIE Description Double Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Enable — The DFDIE bit controls interrupt generation when a double bit fault is detected during a Flash block read operation. 0 DFDIF interrupt disabled 1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the DFDIF flag is set (see Section 13.3.2.8) Single Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Enable — The SFDIE bit controls interrupt generation when a single bit fault is detected during a Flash block read operation. 0 SFDIF interrupt disabled whenever the SFDIF flag is set (see Section 13.3.2.8) 1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the SFDIF flag is set (see Section 13.3.2.8) 0 SFDIE 13.3.2.7 Flash Status Register (FSTAT) The FSTAT register reports the operational status of the Flash module. Offset Module Base + 0x0006 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R CCIF W Reset 1 0 ACCERR 0 0 FPVIOL 0 MGBUSY RSVD MGSTAT[1:0] 0 0 0(1) 01 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-11. Flash Status Register (FSTAT) 1. Reset value can deviate from the value shown if a double bit fault is detected during the reset sequence (see Section 13.6). CCIF, ACCERR, and FPVIOL bits are readable and writable, MGBUSY and MGSTAT bits are readable but not writable, while remaining bits read 0 and are not writable. Table 13-14. FSTAT Field Descriptions Field 7 CCIF Description Command Complete Interrupt Flag — The CCIF flag indicates that a Flash command has completed. The CCIF flag is cleared by writing a 1 to CCIF to launch a command and CCIF will stay low until command completion or command violation. 0 Flash command in progress 1 Flash command has completed Flash Access Error Flag — The ACCERR bit indicates an illegal access has occurred to the Flash memory caused by either a violation of the command write sequence (see Section 13.4.3.2) or issuing an illegal Flash command. While ACCERR is set, the CCIF flag cannot be cleared to launch a command. The ACCERR bit is cleared by writing a 1 to ACCERR. Writing a 0 to the ACCERR bit has no effect on ACCERR. 0 No access error detected 1 Access error detected Flash Protection Violation Flag —The FPVIOL bit indicates an attempt was made to program or erase an address in a protected area of P-Flash or D-Flash memory during a command write sequence. The FPVIOL bit is cleared by writing a 1 to FPVIOL. Writing a 0 to the FPVIOL bit has no effect on FPVIOL. While FPVIOL is set, it is not possible to launch a command or start a command write sequence. 0 No protection violation detected 1 Protection violation detected 5 ACCERR 4 FPVIOL S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 439 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-14. FSTAT Field Descriptions (continued) Field 3 MGBUSY 2 RSVD Description Memory Controller Busy Flag — The MGBUSY flag reflects the active state of the Memory Controller. 0 Memory Controller is idle 1 Memory Controller is busy executing a Flash command (CCIF = 0) Reserved Bit — This bit is reserved and always reads 0. 1–0 Memory Controller Command Completion Status Flag — One or more MGSTAT flag bits are set if an error MGSTAT[1:0] is detected during execution of a Flash command or during the Flash reset sequence. See Section 13.4.5, “Flash Command Description,” and Section 13.6, “Initialization” for details. 13.3.2.8 Flash Error Status Register (FERSTAT) The FERSTAT register reflects the error status of internal Flash operations. Offset Module Base + 0x0007 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 DFDIF SFDIF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-12. Flash Error Status Register (FERSTAT) All flags in the FERSTAT register are readable and only writable to clear the flag. Table 13-15. FERSTAT Field Descriptions Field 1 DFDIF Description Double Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Flag — The setting of the DFDIF flag indicates that a double bit fault was detected in the stored parity and data bits during a Flash array read operation or that a Flash array read operation was attempted on a Flash block that was under a Flash command operation.(1) The DFDIF flag is cleared by writing a 1 to DFDIF. Writing a 0 to DFDIF has no effect on DFDIF. 0 No double bit fault detected 1 Double bit fault detected or an invalid Flash array read operation attempted Single Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Flag — With the IGNSF bit in the FCNFG register clear, the SFDIF flag indicates that a single bit fault was detected in the stored parity and data bits during a Flash array read operation or that a Flash array read operation was attempted on a Flash block that was under a Flash command operation.1 The SFDIF flag is cleared by writing a 1 to SFDIF. Writing a 0 to SFDIF has no effect on SFDIF. 0 No single bit fault detected 1 Single bit fault detected and corrected or an invalid Flash array read operation attempted 1. The single bit fault and double bit fault flags are mutually exclusive for parity errors (an ECC fault occurrence can be either single fault or double fault but never both). A simultaneous access collision (read attempted while command running) is indicated when both SFDIF and DFDIF flags are high. 0 SFDIF 13.3.2.9 P-Flash Protection Register (FPROT) The FPROT register defines which P-Flash sectors are protected against program and erase operations. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 440 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Offset Module Base + 0x0008 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R FPOPEN W Reset F RNV6 FPHDIS F F F FPHS[1:0] F FPLDIS F F FPLS[1:0] F = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-13. Flash Protection Register (FPROT) The (unreserved) bits of the FPROT register are writable with the restriction that the size of the protected region can only be increased (see Section 13.3.2.9.1, “P-Flash Protection Restrictions,” and Table 13-20). During the reset sequence, the FPROT register is loaded with the contents of the P-Flash protection byte in the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0C located in P-Flash memory (see Table 13-3) as indicated by reset condition ‘F’ in Figure 13-13. To change the P-Flash protection that will be loaded during the reset sequence, the upper sector of the P-Flash memory must be unprotected, then the P-Flash protection byte must be reprogrammed. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the P-Flash phrase containing the P-Flash protection byte during the reset sequence, the FPOPEN bit will be cleared and remaining bits in the FPROT register will be set to leave the P-Flash memory fully protected. Trying to alter data in any protected area in the P-Flash memory will result in a protection violation error and the FPVIOL bit will be set in the FSTAT register. The block erase of a P-Flash block is not possible if any of the P-Flash sectors contained in the same P-Flash block are protected. Table 13-16. FPROT Field Descriptions Field 7 FPOPEN Description Flash Protection Operation Enable — The FPOPEN bit determines the protection function for program or erase operations as shown in Table 13-17 for the P-Flash block. 0 When FPOPEN is clear, the FPHDIS and FPLDIS bits define unprotected address ranges as specified by the corresponding FPHS and FPLS bits 1 When FPOPEN is set, the FPHDIS and FPLDIS bits enable protection for the address range specified by the corresponding FPHS and FPLS bits Reserved Nonvolatile Bit — The RNV bit should remain in the erased state for future enhancements. Flash Protection Higher Address Range Disable — The FPHDIS bit determines whether there is a protected/unprotected area in a specific region of the P-Flash memory ending with global address 0x3_FFFF. 0 Protection/Unprotection enabled 1 Protection/Unprotection disabled Flash Protection Higher Address Size — The FPHS bits determine the size of the protected/unprotected area in P-Flash memory as shown inTable 13-18. The FPHS bits can only be written to while the FPHDIS bit is set. Flash Protection Lower Address Range Disable — The FPLDIS bit determines whether there is a protected/unprotected area in a specific region of the P-Flash memory beginning with global address 0x3_8000. 0 Protection/Unprotection enabled 1 Protection/Unprotection disabled Flash Protection Lower Address Size — The FPLS bits determine the size of the protected/unprotected area in P-Flash memory as shown in Table 13-19. The FPLS bits can only be written to while the FPLDIS bit is set. 6 RNV[6] 5 FPHDIS 4–3 FPHS[1:0] 2 FPLDIS 1–0 FPLS[1:0] S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 441 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-17. P-Flash Protection Function FPOPEN 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 FPHDIS 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 FPLDIS 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Function(1) No P-Flash Protection Protected Low Range Protected High Range Protected High and Low Ranges Full P-Flash Memory Protected Unprotected Low Range Unprotected High Range 0 0 0 Unprotected High and Low Ranges 1. For range sizes, refer to Table 13-18 and Table 13-19. Table 13-18. P-Flash Protection Higher Address Range FPHS[1:0] 00 01 10 11 Global Address Range 0x3_F800–0x3_FFFF 0x3_F000–0x3_FFFF 0x3_E000–0x3_FFFF 0x3_C000–0x3_FFFF Protected Size 2 Kbytes 4 Kbytes 8 Kbytes 16 Kbytes Table 13-19. P-Flash Protection Lower Address Range FPLS[1:0] 00 01 10 11 Global Address Range 0x3_8000–0x3_83FF 0x3_8000–0x3_87FF 0x3_8000–0x3_8FFF 0x3_8000–0x3_9FFF Protected Size 1 Kbyte 2 Kbytes 4 Kbytes 8 Kbytes All possible P-Flash protection scenarios are shown in Figure 13-14. Although the protection scheme is loaded from the Flash memory at global address 0x3_FF0C during the reset sequence, it can be changed by the user. The P-Flash protection scheme can be used by applications requiring reprogramming in single chip mode while providing as much protection as possible if reprogramming is not required. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 442 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) FPHDIS = 1 FPLDIS = 1 FLASH START FPHDIS = 1 FPLDIS = 0 6 FPHDIS = 0 FPLDIS = 1 5 FPHDIS = 0 FPLDIS = 0 4 Scenario 7 0x3_8000 0x3_FFFF Scenario FLASH START 3 2 1 0 FPHS[1:0] FPHS[1:0] FPLS[1:0] FPOPEN = 0 443 0x3_8000 0x3_FFFF Unprotected region Protected region not defined by FPLS, FPHS Protected region with size defined by FPLS Protected region with size defined by FPHS Figure 13-14. P-Flash Protection Scenarios S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor FPLS[1:0] FPOPEN = 1 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 13.3.2.9.1 P-Flash Protection Restrictions The general guideline is that P-Flash protection can only be added and not removed. Table 13-20 specifies all valid transitions between P-Flash protection scenarios. Any attempt to write an invalid scenario to the FPROT register will be ignored. The contents of the FPROT register reflect the active protection scenario. See the FPHS and FPLS bit descriptions for additional restrictions. Table 13-20. P-Flash Protection Scenario Transitions From Protection Scenario 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 X X To Protection Scenario(1) 0 X 1 X X X 2 X 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X 4 5 6 7 X X X X X X X X 7 1. Allowed transitions marked with X, see Figure 13-14 for a definition of the scenarios. 13.3.2.10 D-Flash Protection Register (DFPROT) The DFPROT register defines which D-Flash sectors are protected against program and erase operations. Offset Module Base + 0x0009 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R DPOPEN W Reset F 0 0 0 DPS[3:0] 0 0 0 F F F F = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-15. D-Flash Protection Register (DFPROT) The (unreserved) bits of the DFPROT register are writable with the restriction that protection can be added but not removed. Writes must increase the DPS value and the DPOPEN bit can only be written from 1 (protection disabled) to 0 (protection enabled). If the DPOPEN bit is set, the state of the DPS bits is irrelevant. During the reset sequence, the DFPROT register is loaded with the contents of the D-Flash protection byte in the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0D located in P-Flash memory (see Table 13-3) as indicated by reset condition F in Figure 13-15. To change the D-Flash protection that will be loaded during the reset sequence, the P-Flash sector containing the D-Flash protection byte must be unprotected, then the D-Flash protection byte must be programmed. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 444 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) P-Flash phrase containing the D-Flash protection byte during the reset sequence, the DPOPEN bit will be cleared and DPS bits will be set to leave the D-Flash memory fully protected. Trying to alter data in any protected area in the D-Flash memory will result in a protection violation error and the FPVIOL bit will be set in the FSTAT register. Block erase of the D-Flash memory is not possible if any of the D-Flash sectors are protected. Table 13-21. DFPROT Field Descriptions Field 7 DPOPEN Description D-Flash Protection Control 0 Enables D-Flash memory protection from program and erase with protected address range defined by DPS bits 1 Disables D-Flash memory protection from program and erase D-Flash Protection Size — The DPS[3:0] bits determine the size of the protected area in the D-Flash memory as shown in Table 13-22. 3–0 DPS[3:0] Table 13-22. D-Flash Protection Address Range DPS[3:0] 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Global Address Range 0x0_4400 – 0x0_44FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_45FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_46FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_47FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_48FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_49FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_4AFF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_4BFF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_4CFF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_4DFF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_4EFF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_4FFF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_50FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_51FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_52FF 0x0_4400 – 0x0_53FF Protected Size 256 bytes 512 bytes 768 bytes 1024 bytes 1280 bytes 1536 bytes 1792 bytes 2048 bytes 2304 bytes 2560 bytes 2816 bytes 3072 bytes 3328 bytes 3584 bytes 3840 bytes 4096 bytes 13.3.2.11 Flash Common Command Object Register (FCCOB) The FCCOB is an array of six words addressed via the CCOBIX index found in the FCCOBIX register. Byte wide reads and writes are allowed to the FCCOB register. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 445 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Offset Module Base + 0x000A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R CCOB[15:8] W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 13-16. Flash Common Command Object High Register (FCCOBHI) Offset Module Base + 0x000B 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R CCOB[7:0] W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 13-17. Flash Common Command Object Low Register (FCCOBLO) 13.3.2.11.1 FCCOB - NVM Command Mode NVM command mode uses the indexed FCCOB register to provide a command code and its relevant parameters to the Memory Controller. The user first sets up all required FCCOB fields and then initiates the command’s execution by writing a 1 to the CCIF bit in the FSTAT register (a 1 written by the user clears the CCIF command completion flag to 0). When the user clears the CCIF bit in the FSTAT register all FCCOB parameter fields are locked and cannot be changed by the user until the command completes (as evidenced by the Memory Controller returning CCIF to 1). Some commands return information to the FCCOB register array. The generic format for the FCCOB parameter fields in NVM command mode is shown in Table 13-23. The return values are available for reading after the CCIF flag in the FSTAT register has been returned to 1 by the Memory Controller. Writes to the unimplemented parameter fields (CCOBIX = 110 and CCOBIX = 111) are ignored with reads from these fields returning 0x0000. Table 13-23 shows the generic Flash command format. The high byte of the first word in the CCOB array contains the command code, followed by the parameters for this specific Flash command. For details on the FCCOB settings required by each command, see the Flash command descriptions in Section 13.4.5. Table 13-23. FCCOB - NVM Command Mode (Typical Usage) CCOBIX[2:0] 000 LO HI 001 LO HI 010 LO Data 0 [7:0] Global address [7:0] Data 0 [15:8] 6’h0, Global address [17:16] Global address [15:8] Byte HI FCCOB Parameter Fields (NVM Command Mode) FCMD[7:0] defining Flash command S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 446 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-23. FCCOB - NVM Command Mode (Typical Usage) CCOBIX[2:0] 011 LO HI 100 LO HI 101 LO Data 3 [7:0] Data 2 [7:0] Data 3 [15:8] Data 1 [7:0] Data 2 [15:8] Byte HI FCCOB Parameter Fields (NVM Command Mode) Data 1 [15:8] 13.3.2.12 Flash Reserved1 Register (FRSV1) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. Offset Module Base + 0x000C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-18. Flash Reserved1 Register (FRSV1) All bits in the FRSV1 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.13 Flash Reserved2 Register (FRSV2) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. Offset Module Base + 0x000D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-19. Flash Reserved2 Register (FRSV2) All bits in the FRSV2 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.14 Flash Reserved3 Register (FRSV3) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 447 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Offset Module Base + 0x000E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-20. Flash Reserved3 Register (FRSV3) All bits in the FRSV3 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.15 Flash Reserved4 Register (FRSV4) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. Offset Module Base + 0x000F 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-21. Flash Reserved4 Register (FRSV4) All bits in the FRSV4 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.16 Flash Option Register (FOPT) The FOPT register is the Flash option register. Offset Module Base + 0x0010 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset F F F F NV[7:0] F F F F = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-22. Flash Option Register (FOPT) All bits in the FOPT register are readable but are not writable. During the reset sequence, the FOPT register is loaded from the Flash nonvolatile byte in the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0E located in P-Flash memory (see Table 13-3) as indicated by reset condition F in Figure 13-22. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the P-Flash phrase containing the Flash nonvolatile byte during the reset sequence, all bits in the FOPT register will be set. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 448 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-24. FOPT Field Descriptions Field 7–0 NV[7:0] Description Nonvolatile Bits — The NV[7:0] bits are available as nonvolatile bits. Refer to the device user guide for proper use of the NV bits. 13.3.2.17 Flash Reserved5 Register (FRSV5) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. Offset Module Base + 0x0011 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-23. Flash Reserved5 Register (FRSV5) All bits in the FRSV5 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.18 Flash Reserved6 Register (FRSV6) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. Offset Module Base + 0x0012 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-24. Flash Reserved6 Register (FRSV6) All bits in the FRSV6 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.3.2.19 Flash Reserved7 Register (FRSV7) This Flash register is reserved for factory testing. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 449 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Offset Module Base + 0x0013 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 13-25. Flash Reserved7 Register (FRSV7) All bits in the FRSV7 register read 0 and are not writable. 13.4 13.4.1 Functional Description Modes of Operation The FTMRC128K1 module provides the modes of operation shown in Table 13-25. The operating mode is determined by module-level inputs and affects the FCLKDIV, FCNFG, and DFPROT registers, Scratch RAM writes, and the command set availability (see Table 13-27). Table 13-25. Modes and Mode Control Inputs Operating Mode Normal: Special: FTMRC Input mmc_mode_ss_t2 0 1 13.4.2 IFR Version ID Word The version ID word is stored in the IFR at address 0x0_40B6. The contents of the word are defined in Table 13-26. Table 13-26. IFR Version ID Fields [15:4] Reserved [3:0] VERNUM • VERNUM: Version number. The first version is number 0b_0001 with both 0b_0000 and 0b_1111 meaning ‘none’. 13.4.3 Flash Command Operations Flash command operations are used to modify Flash memory contents. The next sections describe: S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 450 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) • • • How to write the FCLKDIV register that is used to generate a time base (FCLK) derived from BUSCLK for Flash program and erase command operations The command write sequence used to set Flash command parameters and launch execution Valid Flash commands available for execution 13.4.3.1 Writing the FCLKDIV Register Prior to issuing any Flash program or erase command after a reset, the user is required to write the FCLKDIV register to divide BUSCLK down to a target FCLK of 1 MHz. Table 13-7 shows recommended values for the FDIV field based on BUSCLK frequency. NOTE Programming or erasing the Flash memory cannot be performed if the bus clock runs at less than 0.8 MHz. Setting FDIV too high can destroy the Flash memory due to overstress. Setting FDIV too low can result in incomplete programming or erasure of the Flash memory cells. When the FCLKDIV register is written, the FDIVLD bit is set automatically. If the FDIVLD bit is 0, the FCLKDIV register has not been written since the last reset. If the FCLKDIV register has not been written, any Flash program or erase command loaded during a command write sequence will not execute and the ACCERR bit in the FSTAT register will set. 13.4.3.2 Command Write Sequence The Memory Controller will launch all valid Flash commands entered using a command write sequence. Before launching a command, the ACCERR and FPVIOL bits in the FSTAT register must be clear (see Section 13.3.2.7) and the CCIF flag should be tested to determine the status of the current command write sequence. If CCIF is 0, the previous command write sequence is still active, a new command write sequence cannot be started, and all writes to the FCCOB register are ignored. CAUTION Writes to any Flash register must be avoided while a Flash command is active (CCIF=0) to prevent corruption of Flash register contents and Memory Controller behavior. 13.4.3.2.1 Define FCCOB Contents The FCCOB parameter fields must be loaded with all required parameters for the Flash command being executed. Access to the FCCOB parameter fields is controlled via the CCOBIX bits in the FCCOBIX register (see Section 13.3.2.3). The contents of the FCCOB parameter fields are transferred to the Memory Controller when the user clears the CCIF command completion flag in the FSTAT register (writing 1 clears the CCIF to 0). The CCIF flag will remain clear until the Flash command has completed. Upon completion, the Memory Controller will return CCIF to 1 and the FCCOB register will be used to communicate any results. The flow for a generic command write sequence is shown in Figure 13-26. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 451 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) START Read: FCLKDIV register Clock Divider Value Check no no Read: FSTAT register CCIF Set? yes FDIV Correct? yes FCCOB Availability Check Note: FCLKDIV must be set after each reset Read: FSTAT register no CCIF Set? yes Write: FCLKDIV register Results from previous Command Access Error and Protection Violation Check ACCERR/ FPVIOL Set? no Write to FCCOBIX register to identify specific command parameter to load. yes Write: FSTAT register Clear ACCERR/FPVIOL 0x30 Write to FCCOB register to load required command parameter. More Parameters? no yes Write: FSTAT register (to launch command) Clear CCIF 0x80 Read: FSTAT register Bit Polling for Command Completion Check CCIF Set? yes EXIT no Figure 13-26. Generic Flash Command Write Sequence Flowchart S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 452 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 13.4.3.3 Valid Flash Module Commands Table 13-27. Flash Commands by Mode Unsecured FCMD Command NS (1) Secured NS (3) SS(2) ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ SS(4) ∗ ∗ 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x10 0x11 Erase Verify All Blocks Erase Verify Block Erase Verify P-Flash Section Read Once Program P-Flash Program Once Erase All Blocks Erase Flash Block Erase P-Flash Sector Unsecure Flash Verify Backdoor Access Key Set User Margin Level Set Field Margin Level Erase Verify D-Flash Section Program D-Flash ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 0x12 Erase D-Flash Sector 1. Unsecured Normal Single Chip mode. 2. Unsecured Special Single Chip mode. 3. Secured Normal Single Chip mode. 4. Secured Special Single Chip mode. 13.4.3.4 P-Flash Commands Table 13-28 summarizes the valid P-Flash commands along with the effects of the commands on the PFlash block and other resources within the Flash module. Table 13-28. P-Flash Commands FCMD 0x01 0x02 0x03 Command Erase Verify All Blocks Erase Verify Block Erase Verify PFlash Section Function on P-Flash Memory Verify that all P-Flash (and D-Flash) blocks are erased. Verify that a P-Flash block is erased. Verify that a given number of words starting at the address provided are erased. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 453 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-28. P-Flash Commands FCMD 0x04 0x06 0x07 Command Read Once Program P-Flash Program Once Function on P-Flash Memory Read a dedicated 64 byte field in the nonvolatile information register in P-Flash block that was previously programmed using the Program Once command. Program a phrase in a P-Flash block. Program a dedicated 64 byte field in the nonvolatile information register in P-Flash block that is allowed to be programmed only once. Erase all P-Flash (and D-Flash) blocks. An erase of all Flash blocks is only possible when the FPLDIS, FPHDIS, and FPOPEN bits in the FPROT register and the DPOPEN bit in the DFPROT register are set prior to launching the command. Erase a P-Flash (or D-Flash) block. An erase of the full P-Flash block is only possible when FPLDIS, FPHDIS and FPOPEN bits in the FPROT register are set prior to launching the command. Erase all bytes in a P-Flash sector. Supports a method of releasing MCU security by erasing all P-Flash (and D-Flash) blocks and verifying that all P-Flash (and D-Flash) blocks are erased. Supports a method of releasing MCU security by verifying a set of security keys. Specifies a user margin read level for all P-Flash blocks. Specifies a field margin read level for all P-Flash blocks (special modes only). 0x08 Erase All Blocks 0x09 Erase Flash Block Erase P-Flash Sector Unsecure Flash Verify Backdoor Access Key Set User Margin Level Set Field Margin Level 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 13.4.3.5 D-Flash Commands Table 13-29 summarizes the valid D-Flash commands along with the effects of the commands on the DFlash block. Table 13-29. D-Flash Commands FCMD 0x01 0x02 Command Erase Verify All Blocks Erase Verify Block Function on D-Flash Memory Verify that all D-Flash (and P-Flash) blocks are erased. Verify that the D-Flash block is erased. Erase all D-Flash (and P-Flash) blocks. An erase of all Flash blocks is only possible when the FPLDIS, FPHDIS, and FPOPEN bits in the FPROT register and the DPOPEN bit in the DFPROT register are set prior to launching the command. Erase a D-Flash (or P-Flash) block. An erase of the full D-Flash block is only possible when DPOPEN bit in the DFPROT register is set prior to launching the command. Supports a method of releasing MCU security by erasing all D-Flash (and P-Flash) blocks and verifying that all D-Flash (and P-Flash) blocks are erased. Specifies a user margin read level for the D-Flash block. Specifies a field margin read level for the D-Flash block (special modes only). 0x08 Erase All Blocks 0x09 Erase Flash Block 0x0B 0x0D 0x0E Unsecure Flash Set User Margin Level Set Field Margin Level S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 454 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-29. D-Flash Commands FCMD 0x10 0x11 0x12 Command Erase Verify DFlash Section Program D-Flash Erase D-Flash Sector Function on D-Flash Memory Verify that a given number of words starting at the address provided are erased. Program up to four words in the D-Flash block. Erase all bytes in a sector of the D-Flash block. 13.4.4 Allowed Simultaneous P-Flash and D-Flash Operations Only the operations marked ‘OK’ in Table 13-30 are permitted to be run simultaneously on the Program Flash and Data Flash blocks. Some operations cannot be executed simultaneously because certain hardware resources are shared by the two memories. The priority has been placed on permitting Program Flash reads while program and erase operations execute on the Data Flash, providing read (P-Flash) while write (D-Flash) functionality. Table 13-30. Allowed P-Flash and D-Flash Simultaneous Operations Data Flash Program Flash Read Margin Read(1) Program Sector Erase OK Read Margin Read1 OK OK(2) Program OK Sector Erase OK Mass Erase3 OK Mass Erase(3) 1. A ‘Margin Read’ is any read after executing the margin setting commands ‘Set User Margin Level’ or ‘Set Field Margin Level’ with anything but the ‘normal’ level specified. 2. See the Note on margin settings in Section 13.4.5.12 and Section 13.4.5.13. 3. The ‘Mass Erase’ operations are commands ‘Erase All Blocks’ and ‘Erase Flash Block’ 13.4.5 Flash Command Description This section provides details of all available Flash commands launched by a command write sequence. The ACCERR bit in the FSTAT register will be set during the command write sequence if any of the following illegal steps are performed, causing the command not to be processed by the Memory Controller: • Starting any command write sequence that programs or erases Flash memory before initializing the FCLKDIV register • Writing an invalid command as part of the command write sequence • For additional possible errors, refer to the error handling table provided for each command S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 455 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) If a Flash block is read during execution of an algorithm (CCIF = 0) on that same block, the read operation will return invalid data. If the SFDIF or DFDIF flags were not previously set when the invalid read operation occurred, both the SFDIF and DFDIF flags will be set. If the ACCERR or FPVIOL bits are set in the FSTAT register, the user must clear these bits before starting any command write sequence (see Section 13.3.2.7). CAUTION A Flash word or phrase must be in the erased state before being programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash word or phrase is not allowed. 13.4.5.1 Erase Verify All Blocks Command Table 13-31. Erase Verify All Blocks Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 0x01 FCCOB Parameters Not required The Erase Verify All Blocks command will verify that all P-Flash and D-Flash blocks have been erased. Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify All Blocks command, the Memory Controller will verify that the entire Flash memory space is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify All Blocks operation has completed. Table 13-32. Erase Verify All Blocks Command Error Handling Register Error Bit ACCERR FPVIOL FSTAT MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if any errors have been encountered during the read Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch None 13.4.5.2 Erase Verify Block Command The Erase Verify Block command allows the user to verify that an entire P-Flash or D-Flash block has been erased. The FCCOB upper global address bits determine which block must be verified. Table 13-33. Erase Verify Block Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 0x02 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] of the Flash block to be verified. Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify Block command, the Memory Controller will verify that the selected P-Flash or D-Flash block is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify Block operation has completed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 456 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-34. Erase Verify Block Command Error Handling Register Error Bit ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 None Set if any errors have been encountered during the read Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch 13.4.5.3 Erase Verify P-Flash Section Command The Erase Verify P-Flash Section command will verify that a section of code in the P-Flash memory is erased. The Erase Verify P-Flash Section command defines the starting point of the code to be verified and the number of phrases. Table 13-35. Erase Verify P-Flash Section Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 0x03 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] of a P-Flash block Global address [15:0] of the first phrase to be verified Number of phrases to be verified Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify P-Flash Section command, the Memory Controller will verify the selected section of Flash memory is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify P-Flash Section operation has completed. Table 13-36. Erase Verify P-Flash Section Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 010 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR FSTAT Set if the requested section crosses a 128 Kbyte boundary FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 None Set if any errors have been encountered during the read Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied Set if a misaligned phrase address is supplied (global address [2:0] != 000) 13.4.5.4 Read Once Command The Read Once command provides read access to a reserved 64 byte field (8 phrases) located in the nonvolatile information register of P-Flash. The Read Once field is programmed using the Program Once S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 457 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) command described in Section 13.4.5.6. The Read Once command must not be executed from the Flash block containing the Program Once reserved field to avoid code runaway. Table 13-37. Read Once Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 0x04 FCCOB Parameters Not Required Read Once phrase index (0x0000 - 0x0007) Read Once word 0 value Read Once word 1 value Read Once word 2 value Read Once word 3 value Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Read Once command, a Read Once phrase is fetched and stored in the FCCOB indexed register. The CCIF flag will set after the Read Once operation has completed. Valid phrase index values for the Read Once command range from 0x0000 to 0x0007. During execution of the Read Once command, any attempt to read addresses within P-Flash block will return invalid data. 8 Table 13-38. Read Once Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch ACCERR FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 None Set if any errors have been encountered during the read Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) Set if an invalid phrase index is supplied 13.4.5.5 Program P-Flash Command The Program P-Flash operation will program a previously erased phrase in the P-Flash memory using an embedded algorithm. CAUTION A P-Flash phrase must be in the erased state before being programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash phrase is not allowed. Table 13-39. Program P-Flash Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 0x06 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify P-Flash block Global address [15:0] of phrase location to be programmed(1) Word 0 program value S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 458 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-39. Program P-Flash Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 011 100 FCCOB Parameters Word 1 program value Word 2 program value 101 Word 3 program value 1. Global address [2:0] must be 000 Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Program P-Flash command, the Memory Controller will program the data words to the supplied global address and will then proceed to verify the data words read back as expected. The CCIF flag will set after the Program P-Flash operation has completed. Table 13-40. Program P-Flash Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 101 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if a misaligned phrase address is supplied (global address [2:0] != 000) Set if the global address [17:0] points to a protected area Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation 13.4.5.6 Program Once Command The Program Once command restricts programming to a reserved 64 byte field (8 phrases) in the nonvolatile information register located in P-Flash. The Program Once reserved field can be read using the Read Once command as described in Section 13.4.5.4. The Program Once command must only be issued once since the nonvolatile information register in P-Flash cannot be erased. The Program Once command must not be executed from the Flash block containing the Program Once reserved field to avoid code runaway. Table 13-41. Program Once Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 0x07 FCCOB Parameters Not Required Program Once phrase index (0x0000 - 0x0007) Program Once word 0 value Program Once word 1 value Program Once word 2 value Program Once word 3 value S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 459 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Program Once command, the Memory Controller first verifies that the selected phrase is erased. If erased, then the selected phrase will be programmed and then verified with read back. The CCIF flag will remain clear, setting only after the Program Once operation has completed. The reserved nonvolatile information register accessed by the Program Once command cannot be erased and any attempt to program one of these phrases a second time will not be allowed. Valid phrase index values for the Program Once command range from 0x0000 to 0x0007. During execution of the Program Once command, any attempt to read addresses within P-Flash will return invalid data. Table 13-42. Program Once Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 101 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid phrase index is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if the requested phrase has already been programmed(1) None Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation 1. If a Program Once phrase is initially programmed to 0xFFFF_FFFF_FFFF_FFFF, the Program Once command will be allowed to execute again on that same phrase. 13.4.5.7 Erase All Blocks Command Table 13-43. Erase All Blocks Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 0x08 FCCOB Parameters Not required The Erase All Blocks operation will erase the entire P-Flash and D-Flash memory space. Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase All Blocks command, the Memory Controller will erase the entire Flash memory space and verify that it is erased. If the Memory Controller verifies that the entire Flash memory space was properly erased, security will be released. During the execution of this command (CCIF=0) the user must not write to any Flash module register. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase All Blocks operation has completed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 460 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-44. Erase All Blocks Command Error Handling Register Error Bit ACCERR Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if any area of the P-Flash or D-Flash memory is protected Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch 13.4.5.8 Erase Flash Block Command Table 13-45. Erase Flash Block Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 0x09 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify Flash block The Erase Flash Block operation will erase all addresses in a P-Flash or D-Flash block. Global address [15:0] in Flash block to be erased Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Flash Block command, the Memory Controller will erase the selected Flash block and verify that it is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Flash Block operation has completed. Table 13-46. Erase Flash Block Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied Set if the supplied P-Flash address is not phrase-aligned or if the D-Flash address is not word-aligned FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if an area of the selected Flash block is protected Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation FSTAT 13.4.5.9 Erase P-Flash Sector Command The Erase P-Flash Sector operation will erase all addresses in a P-Flash sector. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 461 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-47. Erase P-Flash Sector Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 0x0A FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify P-Flash block to be erased Global address [15:0] anywhere within the sector to be erased. Refer to Section 13.1.2.1 for the P-Flash sector size. Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase P-Flash Sector command, the Memory Controller will erase the selected Flash sector and then verify that it is erased. The CCIF flag will be set after the Erase P-Flash Sector operation has completed. Table 13-48. Erase P-Flash Sector Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if a misaligned phrase address is supplied (global address [2:0] != 000) Set if the selected P-Flash sector is protected Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation 13.4.5.10 Unsecure Flash Command The Unsecure Flash command will erase the entire P-Flash and D-Flash memory space and, if the erase is successful, will release security. Table 13-49. Unsecure Flash Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 0x0B FCCOB Parameters Not required Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Unsecure Flash command, the Memory Controller will erase the entire P-Flash and D-Flash memory space and verify that it is erased. If the Memory Controller verifies that the entire Flash memory space was properly erased, security will be released. If the erase verify is not successful, the Unsecure Flash operation sets MGSTAT1 and terminates without changing the security state. During the execution of this command (CCIF=0) the user must not write to any Flash module register. The CCIF flag is set after the Unsecure Flash operation has completed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 462 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-50. Unsecure Flash Command Error Handling Register Error Bit ACCERR Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if any area of the P-Flash or D-Flash memory is protected Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch 13.4.5.11 Verify Backdoor Access Key Command The Verify Backdoor Access Key command will only execute if it is enabled by the KEYEN bits in the FSEC register (see Table 13-9). The Verify Backdoor Access Key command releases security if usersupplied keys match those stored in the Flash security bytes of the Flash configuration field (see Table 133). The Verify Backdoor Access Key command must not be executed from the Flash block containing the backdoor comparison key to avoid code runaway. Table 13-51. Verify Backdoor Access Key Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 0x0C Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 FCCOB Parameters Not required Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Verify Backdoor Access Key command, the Memory Controller will check the FSEC KEYEN bits to verify that this command is enabled. If not enabled, the Memory Controller sets the ACCERR bit in the FSTAT register and terminates. If the command is enabled, the Memory Controller compares the key provided in FCCOB to the backdoor comparison key in the Flash configuration field with Key 0 compared to 0x3_FF00, etc. If the backdoor keys match, security will be released. If the backdoor keys do not match, security is not released and all future attempts to execute the Verify Backdoor Access Key command are aborted (set ACCERR) until a reset occurs. The CCIF flag is set after the Verify Backdoor Access Key operation has completed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 463 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-52. Verify Backdoor Access Key Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 100 at command launch Set if an incorrect backdoor key is supplied ACCERR FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if backdoor key access has not been enabled (KEYEN[1:0] != 10, see Section 13.3.2.2) Set if the backdoor key has mismatched since the last reset None None None 13.4.5.12 Set User Margin Level Command The Set User Margin Level command causes the Memory Controller to set the margin level for future read operations of the P-Flash or D-Flash block. Table 13-53. Set User Margin Level Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 0x0D FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify the Flash block Margin level setting Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Set User Margin Level command, the Memory Controller will set the user margin level for the targeted block and then set the CCIF flag. NOTE When the D-Flash block is targeted, the D-Flash user margin levels are applied only to the D-Flash reads. However, when the P-Flash block is targeted, the P-Flash user margin levels are applied to both P-Flash and DFlash reads. It is not possible to apply user margin levels to the P-Flash block only. Valid margin level settings for the Set User Margin Level command are defined in Table 13-54. Table 13-54. Valid Set User Margin Level Settings CCOB (CCOBIX=001) 0x0000 0x0001 Level Description Return to Normal Level User Margin-1 Level(1) 0x0002 User Margin-0 Level(2) 1. Read margin to the erased state 2. Read margin to the programmed state S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 464 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-55. Set User Margin Level Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if an invalid margin level setting is supplied None None None NOTE User margin levels can be used to check that Flash memory contents have adequate margin for normal level read operations. If unexpected results are encountered when checking Flash memory contents at user margin levels, a potential loss of information has been detected. 13.4.5.13 Set Field Margin Level Command The Set Field Margin Level command, valid in special modes only, causes the Memory Controller to set the margin level specified for future read operations of the P-Flash or D-Flash block. Table 13-56. Set Field Margin Level Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 0x0E FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify the Flash block Margin level setting Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Set Field Margin Level command, the Memory Controller will set the field margin level for the targeted block and then set the CCIF flag. NOTE When the D-Flash block is targeted, the D-Flash field margin levels are applied only to the D-Flash reads. However, when the P-Flash block is targeted, the P-Flash field margin levels are applied to both P-Flash and DFlash reads. It is not possible to apply field margin levels to the P-Flash block only. Valid margin level settings for the Set Field Margin Level command are defined in Table 13-57. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 465 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-57. Valid Set Field Margin Level Settings CCOB (CCOBIX=001) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 Level Description Return to Normal Level User Margin-1 Level(1) User Margin-0 Level(2) Field Margin-1 Level1 0x0004 Field Margin-0 Level2 1. Read margin to the erased state 2. Read margin to the programmed state Table 13-58. Set Field Margin Level Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if an invalid margin level setting is supplied None None None CAUTION Field margin levels must only be used during verify of the initial factory programming. NOTE Field margin levels can be used to check that Flash memory contents have adequate margin for data retention at the normal level setting. If unexpected results are encountered when checking Flash memory contents at field margin levels, the Flash memory contents should be erased and reprogrammed. 13.4.5.14 Erase Verify D-Flash Section Command The Erase Verify D-Flash Section command will verify that a section of code in the D-Flash is erased. The Erase Verify D-Flash Section command defines the starting point of the data to be verified and the number of words. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 466 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-59. Erase Verify D-Flash Section Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 0x10 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify the D-Flash block Global address [15:0] of the first word to be verified Number of words to be verified Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify D-Flash Section command, the Memory Controller will verify the selected section of D-Flash memory is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify DFlash Section operation has completed. Table 13-60. Erase Verify D-Flash Section Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 010 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR FSTAT Set if the requested section breaches the end of the D-Flash block FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 None Set if any errors have been encountered during the read Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied Set if a misaligned word address is supplied (global address [0] != 0) 13.4.5.15 Program D-Flash Command The Program D-Flash operation programs one to four previously erased words in the D-Flash block. The Program D-Flash operation will confirm that the targeted location(s) were successfully programmed upon completion. CAUTION A Flash word must be in the erased state before being programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash word is not allowed. Table 13-61. Program D-Flash Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 0x11 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify the D-Flash block Global address [15:0] of word to be programmed Word 0 program value Word 1 program value, if desired Word 2 program value, if desired S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 467 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-61. Program D-Flash Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 101 FCCOB Parameters Word 3 program value, if desired Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Program D-Flash command, the user-supplied words will be transferred to the Memory Controller and be programmed if the area is unprotected. The CCOBIX index value at Program D-Flash command launch determines how many words will be programmed in the D-Flash block. The CCIF flag is set when the operation has completed. Table 13-62. Program D-Flash Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] < 010 at command launch Set if CCOBIX[2:0] > 101 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if a misaligned word address is supplied (global address [0] != 0) Set if the requested group of words breaches the end of the D-Flash block Set if the selected area of the D-Flash memory is protected Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation 13.4.5.16 Erase D-Flash Sector Command The Erase D-Flash Sector operation will erase all addresses in a sector of the D-Flash block. Table 13-63. Erase D-Flash Sector Command FCCOB Requirements CCOBIX[2:0] 000 001 0x12 FCCOB Parameters Global address [17:16] to identify D-Flash block Global address [15:0] anywhere within the sector to be erased. See Section 13.1.2.2 for D-Flash sector size. Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase D-Flash Sector command, the Memory Controller will erase the selected Flash sector and verify that it is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase D-Flash Sector operation has completed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 468 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) Table 13-64. Erase D-Flash Sector Command Error Handling Register Error Bit Error Condition Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 13-27) ACCERR Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied FSTAT FPVIOL MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 Set if a misaligned word address is supplied (global address [0] != 0) Set if the selected area of the D-Flash memory is protected Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify operation 13.4.6 Interrupts The Flash module can generate an interrupt when a Flash command operation has completed or when a Flash command operation has detected an ECC fault. Table 13-65. Flash Interrupt Sources Interrupt Source Flash Command Complete ECC Double Bit Fault on Flash Read ECC Single Bit Fault on Flash Read Interrupt Flag CCIF (FSTAT register) DFDIF (FERSTAT register) SFDIF (FERSTAT register) Local Enable CCIE (FCNFG register) DFDIE (FERCNFG register) SFDIE (FERCNFG register) Global (CCR) Mask I Bit I Bit I Bit NOTE Vector addresses and their relative interrupt priority are determined at the MCU level. 13.4.6.1 Description of Flash Interrupt Operation The Flash module uses the CCIF flag in combination with the CCIE interrupt enable bit to generate the Flash command interrupt request. The Flash module uses the DFDIF and SFDIF flags in combination with the DFDIE and SFDIE interrupt enable bits to generate the Flash error interrupt request. For a detailed description of the register bits involved, refer to Section 13.3.2.5, “Flash Configuration Register (FCNFG)”, Section 13.3.2.6, “Flash Error Configuration Register (FERCNFG)”, Section 13.3.2.7, “Flash Status Register (FSTAT)”, and Section 13.3.2.8, “Flash Error Status Register (FERSTAT)”. The logic used for generating the Flash module interrupts is shown in Figure 13-27. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 469 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) CCIE CCIF Flash Command Interrupt Request DFDIE DFDIF SFDIE SFDIF Flash Error Interrupt Request Figure 13-27. Flash Module Interrupts Implementation 13.4.7 Wait Mode The Flash module is not affected if the MCU enters wait mode. The Flash module can recover the MCU from wait via the CCIF interrupt (see Section 13.4.6, “Interrupts”). 13.4.8 Stop Mode If a Flash command is active (CCIF = 0) when the MCU requests stop mode, the current Flash operation will be completed before the CPU is allowed to enter stop mode. 13.5 Security The Flash module provides security information to the MCU. The Flash security state is defined by the SEC bits of the FSEC register (see Table 13-10). During reset, the Flash module initializes the FSEC register using data read from the security byte of the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0F. The security state out of reset can be permanently changed by programming the security byte assuming that the MCU is starting from a mode where the necessary P-Flash erase and program commands are available and that the upper region of the P-Flash is unprotected. If the Flash security byte is successfully programmed, its new value will take affect after the next MCU reset. The following subsections describe these security-related subjects: • Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access • Unsecuring the MCU in Special Single Chip Mode using BDM • Mode and Security Effects on Flash Command Availability 13.5.1 Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access The MCU may be unsecured by using the backdoor key access feature which requires knowledge of the contents of the backdoor keys (four 16-bit words programmed at addresses 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07). If the KEYEN[1:0] bits are in the enabled state (see Section 13.3.2.2), the Verify Backdoor Access Key command (see Section 13.4.5.11) allows the user to present four prospective keys for comparison to the keys stored in the Flash memory via the Memory Controller. If the keys presented in the Verify Backdoor Access Key command match the backdoor keys stored in the Flash memory, the SEC bits in the FSEC S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 470 Freescale Semiconductor 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) register (see Table 13-10) will be changed to unsecure the MCU. Key values of 0x0000 and 0xFFFF are not permitted as backdoor keys. While the Verify Backdoor Access Key command is active, P-Flash memory and D-Flash memory will not be available for read access and will return invalid data. The user code stored in the P-Flash memory must have a method of receiving the backdoor keys from an external stimulus. This external stimulus would typically be through one of the on-chip serial ports. If the KEYEN[1:0] bits are in the enabled state (see Section 13.3.2.2), the MCU can be unsecured by the backdoor key access sequence described below: 1. Follow the command sequence for the Verify Backdoor Access Key command as explained in Section 13.4.5.11 2. If the Verify Backdoor Access Key command is successful, the MCU is unsecured and the SEC[1:0] bits in the FSEC register are forced to the unsecure state of 10 The Verify Backdoor Access Key command is monitored by the Memory Controller and an illegal key will prohibit future use of the Verify Backdoor Access Key command. A reset of the MCU is the only method to re-enable the Verify Backdoor Access Key command. The security as defined in the Flash security byte (0x3_FF0F) is not changed by using the Verify Backdoor Access Key command sequence. The backdoor keys stored in addresses 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07 are unaffected by the Verify Backdoor Access Key command sequence. The Verify Backdoor Access Key command sequence has no effect on the program and erase protections defined in the Flash protection register, FPROT. After the backdoor keys have been correctly matched, the MCU will be unsecured. After the MCU is unsecured, the sector containing the Flash security byte can be erased and the Flash security byte can be reprogrammed to the unsecure state, if desired. In the unsecure state, the user has full control of the contents of the backdoor keys by programming addresses 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07 in the Flash configuration field. 13.5.2 Unsecuring the MCU in Special Single Chip Mode using BDM A secured MCU can be unsecured in special single chip mode by using the following method to erase the P-Flash and D-Flash memory: 1. Reset the MCU into special single chip mode 2. Delay while the BDM executes the Erase Verify All Blocks command write sequence to check if the P-Flash and D-Flash memories are erased 3. Send BDM commands to disable protection in the P-Flash and D-Flash memory 4. Execute the Erase All Blocks command write sequence to erase the P-Flash and D-Flash memory 5. After the CCIF flag sets to indicate that the Erase All Blocks operation has completed, reset the MCU into special single chip mode 6. Delay while the BDM executes the Erase Verify All Blocks command write sequence to verify that the P-Flash and D-Flash memory are erased If the P-Flash and D-Flash memory are verified as erased, the MCU will be unsecured. All BDM commands will now be enabled and the Flash security byte may be programmed to the unsecure state by continuing with the following steps: S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 471 128 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRC128K1V1) 7. Send BDM commands to execute the Program P-Flash command write sequence to program the Flash security byte to the unsecured state 8. Reset the MCU 13.5.3 Mode and Security Effects on Flash Command Availability The availability of Flash module commands depends on the MCU operating mode and security state as shown in Table 13-27. 13.6 Initialization On each system reset the Flash module executes a reset sequence which establishes initial values for the Flash Block Configuration Parameters, the FPROT and DFPROT protection registers, and the FOPT and FSEC registers. The Flash module reverts to using built-in default values that leave the module in a fully protected and secured state if errors are encountered during execution of the reset sequence. If a double bit fault is detected during the reset sequence, both MGSTAT bits in the FSTAT register will be set. CCIF remains clear throughout the reset sequence. The Flash module holds off all CPU access for the initial portion of the reset sequence. While Flash memory reads and access to most Flash registers are possible when the hold is removed, writes to the FCCOBIX, FCCOBHI, and FCCOBLO registers are ignored. Completion of the reset sequence is marked by setting CCIF high which enables writes to the FCCOBIX, FCCOBHI, and FCCOBLO registers to launch any available Flash command. If a reset occurs while any Flash command is in progress, that command will be immediately aborted. The state of the word being programmed or the sector/block being erased is not guaranteed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 472 Freescale Semiconductor Chapter 14 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-1. Revision History Revision Number V02.04 Revision Date 1 Jul 2008 Sections Affected 14.3.2.12/14488 14.3.2.13/14489 14.3.2.16/14492 14.4.2/14-497 14.4.3/14-497 14.3.2.12/14488 14.3.2.13/14489 14.3.2.15/14491 14.3.2.16/14492 14.3.2.19/14494 14.4.2/14-497 14.4.3/14-497 14.1.2/14-474 14.3.2.15/14491 14.3.2.2/14-480 14.3.2.3/14-481 14.3.2.4/14-482 14.4.3/14-497 Description of Changes - Revised flag clearing procedure, whereby TEN bit must be set when clearing flags. V02.05 9 Jul 2009 - Revised flag clearing procedure, whereby TEN or PAEN bit must be set when clearing flags. - Add fomula to describe prescaler V02.06 26 Aug 2009 - Correct typo: TSCR ->TSCR1 - Correct reference: Figure 1-25 -> Figure 1-31 - Add description, “a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set”, to be the condition of channel 7 override event. - Phrase the description of OC7M to make it more explicit 14.1 Introduction The basic timer consists of a 16-bit, software-programmable counter driven by a enhanced programmable prescaler. This timer can be used for many purposes, including input waveform measurements while simultaneously generating an output waveform. Pulse widths can vary from microseconds to many seconds. This timer contains 8 complete input capture/output compare channels and one pulse accumulator. The input capture function is used to detect a selected transition edge and record the time. The output compare function is used for generating output signals or for timer software delays. The 16-bit pulse accumulator S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 473 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description is used to operate as a simple event counter or a gated time accumulator. The pulse accumulator shares timer channel 7 when in event mode. A full access for the counter registers or the input capture/output compare registers should take place in one clock cycle. Accessing high byte and low byte separately for all of these registers may not yield the same result as accessing them in one word. 14.1.1 Features The TIM16B8CV2 includes these distinctive features: • Eight input capture/output compare channels. • Clock prescaling. • 16-bit counter. • 16-bit pulse accumulator. 14.1.2 Stop: Freeze: Wait: Normal: Modes of Operation Timer is off because clocks are stopped. Timer counter keep on running, unless TSFRZ in TSCR1 (0x0006) is set to 1. Counters keep on running, unless TSWAI in TSCR1 (0x0006) is set to 1. Timer counter keep on running, unless TEN in TSCR1 (0x0006) is cleared to 0. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 474 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.1.3 Block Diagrams Channel 0 Input capture Output compare Channel 1 Input capture Output compare Channel 2 Input capture Output compare Channel 3 Input capture Output compare Registers Channel 4 Input capture Output compare Channel 5 Input capture Output compare Bus clock Prescaler IOC0 16-bit Counter IOC1 Timer overflow interrupt Timer channel 0 interrupt IOC2 IOC3 IOC4 IOC5 Timer channel 7 interrupt Channel 6 Input capture Output compare 16-bit Pulse accumulator Channel 7 Input capture Output compare IOC6 PA overflow interrupt PA input interrupt IOC7 Figure 14-1. TIM16B8CV2 Block Diagram S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 475 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description TIMCLK (Timer clock) CLK1 CLK0 4:1 MUX PACLK / 256 Prescaled clock (PCLK) PACLK / 65536 Clock select (PAMOD) PACLK Edge detector PT7 Intermodule Bus Interrupt PACNT MUX Divide by 64 M clock Figure 14-2. 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator Block Diagram 16-bit Main Timer PTn Edge detector Set CnF Interrupt TCn Input Capture Reg. Figure 14-3. Interrupt Flag Setting S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 476 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description PULSE ACCUMULATOR CHANNEL 7 OUTPUT COMPARE OCPD TEN TIOS7 PAD Figure 14-4. Channel 7 Output Compare/Pulse Accumulator Logic 14.2 External Signal Description The TIM16B8CV2 module has a total of eight external pins. 14.2.1 IOC7 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 7 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 7. This can also be configured as pulse accumulator input. 14.2.2 IOC6 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 6 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 6. 14.2.3 IOC5 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 5 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 5. 14.2.4 IOC4 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 4 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 4. Pin 14.2.5 IOC3 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 3 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 3. 14.2.6 IOC2 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 2 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 2. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 477 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.2.7 IOC1 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 1 Pin This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 1. 14.2.8 IOC0 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 0 Pin NOTE For the description of interrupts see Section 14.6, “Interrupts”. This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 0. 14.3 Memory Map and Register Definition This section provides a detailed description of all memory and registers. 14.3.1 Module Memory Map The memory map for the TIM16B8CV2 module is given below in Figure 14-5. The address listed for each register is the address offset. The total address for each register is the sum of the base address for the TIM16B8CV2 module and the address offset for each register. 14.3.2 Register Descriptions This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register diagram with an associated figure number. Details of register bit and field function follow the register diagrams, in bit order. Register Name 0x0000 TIOS 0x0001 CFORC 0x0002 OC7M 0x0003 OC7D 0x0004 TCNTH 0x0005 TCNTL R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0 IOS7 IOS6 IOS5 IOS4 IOS3 IOS2 IOS1 IOS0 0 FOC7 OC7M7 0 FOC6 OC7M6 0 FOC5 OC7M5 0 FOC4 OC7M4 0 FOC3 OC7M3 0 FOC2 OC7M2 0 FOC1 OC7M1 0 FOC0 OC7M0 OC7D7 OC7D6 OC7D5 OC7D4 OC7D3 OC7D2 OC7D1 OC7D0 TCNT15 TCNT14 TCNT13 TCNT12 TCNT11 TCNT10 TCNT9 TCNT8 TCNT7 TCNT6 TCNT5 TCNT4 TCNT3 TCNT2 TCNT1 TCNT0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-5. TIM16B8CV2 Register Summary (Sheet 1 of 3) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 478 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Register Name 0x0006 TSCR1 0x0007 TTOV 0x0008 TCTL1 0x0009 TCTL2 0x000A TCTL3 0x000B TCTL4 0x000C TIE 0x000D TSCR2 0x000E TFLG1 0x000F TFLG2 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 TEN 6 TSWAI 5 TSFRZ 4 TFFCA 3 PRNT 2 0 1 0 Bit 0 0 TOV7 TOV6 TOV5 TOV4 TOV3 TOV2 TOV1 TOV0 OM7 OL7 OM6 OL6 OM5 OL5 OM4 OL4 OM3 OL3 OM2 OL2 OM1 OL1 OM0 OL0 EDG7B EDG7A EDG6B EDG6A EDG5B EDG5A EDG4B EDG4A EDG3B EDG3A EDG2B EDG2A EDG1B EDG1A EDG0B EDG0A C7I C6I 0 C5I 0 C4I 0 C3I C2I C1I C0I TOI TCRE PR2 PR1 PR0 C7F C6F 0 C5F 0 C4F 0 C3F 0 C2F 0 C1F 0 C0F 0 TOF Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 0x0010–0x001F TCxH–TCxL Bit 7 0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0x0020 PACTL 0x0021 PAFLG 0x0022 PACNTH 0x0023 PACNTL 0x0024–0x002B Reserved PAEN 0 PAMOD 0 PEDGE 0 CLK1 0 CLK0 0 PAOVI PAI 0 PAOVF PAIF R PACNT15 W R W R W PACNT7 PACNT14 PACNT13 PACNT12 PACNT11 PACNT10 PACNT9 PACNT8 PACNT6 PACNT5 PACNT4 PACNT3 PACNT2 PACNT1 PACNT0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-5. TIM16B8CV2 Register Summary (Sheet 2 of 3) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 479 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Register Name 0x002C OCPD 0x002D R W R Bit 7 OCPD7 6 OCPD6 5 OCPD5 4 OCPD4 3 OCPD3 2 OCPD2 1 OCPD1 Bit 0 OCPD0 0x002E PTPSR 0x002F Reserved R W R W PTPS7 PTPS6 PTPS5 PTPS4 PTPS3 PTPS2 PTPS1 PTPS0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-5. TIM16B8CV2 Register Summary (Sheet 3 of 3) 14.3.2.1 Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Select (TIOS) Module Base + 0x0000 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R IOS7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IOS6 IOS5 IOS4 IOS3 IOS2 IOS1 IOS0 Figure 14-6. Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Select (TIOS) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 14-2. TIOS Field Descriptions Field 7:0 IOS[7:0] Description Input Capture or Output Compare Channel Configuration 0 The corresponding channel acts as an input capture. 1 The corresponding channel acts as an output compare. 14.3.2.2 Timer Compare Force Register (CFORC) Module Base + 0x0001 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 FOC7 0 0 FOC6 0 0 FOC5 0 0 FOC4 0 0 FOC3 0 0 FOC2 0 0 FOC1 0 0 FOC0 0 Figure 14-7. Timer Compare Force Register (CFORC) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 480 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Read: Anytime but will always return 0x0000 (1 state is transient) Write: Anytime Table 14-3. CFORC Field Descriptions Field 7:0 FOC[7:0] Description Force Output Compare Action for Channel 7:0 — A write to this register with the corresponding data bit(s) set causes the action which is programmed for output compare “x” to occur immediately. The action taken is the same as if a successful comparison had just taken place with the TCx register except the interrupt flag does not get set. Note: A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a successful output compare on channel 7, overrides any channel 6:0 compares. If forced output compare on any channel occurs at the same time as the successful output compare then forced output compare action will take precedence and interrupt flag won’t get set. 14.3.2.3 Output Compare 7 Mask Register (OC7M) Module Base + 0x0002 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R OC7M7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OC7M6 OC7M5 OC7M4 OC7M3 OC7M2 OC7M1 OC7M0 Figure 14-8. Output Compare 7 Mask Register (OC7M) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 14-4. OC7M Field Descriptions Field 7:0 OC7M[7:0] Description Output Compare 7 Mask — A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a successful output compare on channel 7, overrides any channel 6:0 compares. For each OC7M bit that is set, the output compare action reflects the corresponding OC7D bit. 0 The corresponding OC7Dx bit in the output compare 7 data register will not be transferred to the timer port on a channel 7 event, even if the corresponding pin is setup for output compare. 1 The corresponding OC7Dx bit in the output compare 7 data register will be transferred to the timer port on a channel 7 event. Note: The corresponding channel must also be setup for output compare (IOSx = 1 and OCPDx = 0) for data to be transferred from the output compare 7 data register to the timer port. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 481 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.3.2.4 Output Compare 7 Data Register (OC7D) Module Base + 0x0003 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R OC7D7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OC7D6 OC7D5 OC7D4 OC7D3 OC7D2 OC7D1 OC7D0 Figure 14-9. Output Compare 7 Data Register (OC7D) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 14-5. OC7D Field Descriptions Field 7:0 OC7D[7:0] Description Output Compare 7 Data — A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a successful output compare on channel 7, can cause bits in the output compare 7 data register to transfer to the timer port data register depending on the output compare 7 mask register. 14.3.2.5 Timer Count Register (TCNT) Module Base + 0x0004 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 9 R TCNT15 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCNT14 TCNT13 TCNT12 TCNT11 TCNT10 TCNT9 TCNT8 Figure 14-10. Timer Count Register High (TCNTH) Module Base + 0x0005 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R TCNT7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCNT6 TCNT5 TCNT4 TCNT3 TCNT2 TCNT1 TCNT0 Figure 14-11. Timer Count Register Low (TCNTL) The 16-bit main timer is an up counter. A full access for the counter register should take place in one clock cycle. A separate read/write for high byte and low byte will give a different result than accessing them as a word. Read: Anytime S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 482 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Write: Has no meaning or effect in the normal mode; only writable in special modes (test_mode = 1). The period of the first count after a write to the TCNT registers may be a different size because the write is not synchronized with the prescaler clock. 14.3.2.6 Timer System Control Register 1 (TSCR1) Module Base + 0x0006 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R TEN W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 TSWAI TSFRZ TFFCA PRNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-12. Timer System Control Register 1 (TSCR1) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 14-6. TSCR1 Field Descriptions Field 7 TEN Description Timer Enable 0 Disables the main timer, including the counter. Can be used for reducing power consumption. 1 Allows the timer to function normally. If for any reason the timer is not active, there is no ÷64 clock for the pulse accumulator because the ÷64 is generated by the timer prescaler. Timer Module Stops While in Wait 0 Allows the timer module to continue running during wait. 1 Disables the timer module when the MCU is in the wait mode. Timer interrupts cannot be used to get the MCU out of wait. TSWAI also affects pulse accumulator. Timer Stops While in Freeze Mode 0 Allows the timer counter to continue running while in freeze mode. 1 Disables the timer counter whenever the MCU is in freeze mode. This is useful for emulation. TSFRZ does not stop the pulse accumulator. 6 TSWAI 5 TSFRZ S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 483 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-6. TSCR1 Field Descriptions (continued) Field 4 TFFCA Description Timer Fast Flag Clear All 0 Allows the timer flag clearing to function normally. 1 For TFLG1(0x000E), a read from an input capture or a write to the output compare channel (0x0010–0x001F) causes the corresponding channel flag, CnF, to be cleared. For TFLG2 (0x000F), any access to the TCNT register (0x0004, 0x0005) clears the TOF flag. Any access to the PACNT registers (0x0022, 0x0023) clears the PAOVF and PAIF flags in the PAFLG register (0x0021). This has the advantage of eliminating software overhead in a separate clear sequence. Extra care is required to avoid accidental flag clearing due to unintended accesses. Precision Timer 0 Enables legacy timer. PR0, PR1, and PR2 bits of the TSCR2 register are used for timer counter prescaler selection. 1 Enables precision timer. All bits of the PTPSR register are used for Precision Timer Prescaler Selection, and all bits. This bit is writable only once out of reset. 3 PRNT 14.3.2.7 Timer Toggle On Overflow Register 1 (TTOV) Module Base + 0x0007 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R TOV7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOV6 TOV5 TOV4 TOV3 TOV2 TOV1 TOV0 Figure 14-13. Timer Toggle On Overflow Register 1 (TTOV) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 14-7. TTOV Field Descriptions Field 7:0 TOV[7:0] Description Toggle On Overflow Bits — TOVx toggles output compare pin on overflow. This feature only takes effect when in output compare mode. When set, it takes precedence over forced output compare but not channel 7 override events. 0 Toggle output compare pin on overflow feature disabled. 1 Toggle output compare pin on overflow feature enabled. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 484 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.3.2.8 Timer Control Register 1/Timer Control Register 2 (TCTL1/TCTL2) Module Base + 0x0008 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R OM7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OL7 OM6 OL6 OM5 OL5 OM4 OL4 Figure 14-14. Timer Control Register 1 (TCTL1) Module Base + 0x0009 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R OM3 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OL3 OM2 OL2 OM1 OL1 OM0 OL0 Figure 14-15. Timer Control Register 2 (TCTL2) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime Table 14-8. TCTL1/TCTL2 Field Descriptions Field 7:0 OMx Description Output Mode — These eight pairs of control bits are encoded to specify the output action to be taken as a result of a successful OCx compare. When either OMx or OLx is 1, the pin associated with OCx becomes an output tied to OCx. Note: To enable output action by OMx bits on timer port, the corresponding bit in OC7M should be cleared. For an output line to be driven by an OCx the OCPDx must be cleared. Output Level — These eight pairs of control bits are encoded to specify the output action to be taken as a result of a successful OCx compare. When either OMx or OLx is 1, the pin associated with OCx becomes an output tied to OCx. Note: To enable output action by OLx bits on timer port, the corresponding bit in OC7M should be cleared. For an output line to be driven by an OCx the OCPDx must be cleared. 7:0 OLx Table 14-9. Compare Result Output Action OMx 0 0 1 1 OLx 0 1 0 1 Action No output compare action on the timer output signal Toggle OCx output line Clear OCx output line to zero Set OCx output line to one S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 485 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description To operate the 16-bit pulse accumulator independently of input capture or output compare 7 and 0 respectively the user must set the corresponding bits IOSx = 1, OMx = 0 and OLx = 0. OC7M7 in the OC7M register must also be cleared. 14.3.2.9 Timer Control Register 3/Timer Control Register 4 (TCTL3 and TCTL4) Module Base + 0x000A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R EDG7B W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EDG7A EDG6B EDG6A EDG5B EDG5A EDG4B EDG4A Figure 14-16. Timer Control Register 3 (TCTL3) Module Base + 0x000B 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R EDG3B W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EDG3A EDG2B EDG2A EDG1B EDG1A EDG0B EDG0A Figure 14-17. Timer Control Register 4 (TCTL4) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime. Table 14-10. TCTL3/TCTL4 Field Descriptions Field 7:0 EDGnB EDGnA Description Input Capture Edge Control — These eight pairs of control bits configure the input capture edge detector circuits. Table 14-11. Edge Detector Circuit Configuration EDGnB 0 0 1 1 EDGnA 0 1 0 1 Configuration Capture disabled Capture on rising edges only Capture on falling edges only Capture on any edge (rising or falling) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 486 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.3.2.10 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIE) Module Base + 0x000C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R C7I W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6I C5I C4I C3I C2I C1I C0I Figure 14-18. Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIE) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime. Table 14-12. TIE Field Descriptions Field 7:0 C7I:C0I Description Input Capture/Output Compare “x” Interrupt Enable — The bits in TIE correspond bit-for-bit with the bits in the TFLG1 status register. If cleared, the corresponding flag is disabled from causing a hardware interrupt. If set, the corresponding flag is enabled to cause a interrupt. 14.3.2.11 Timer System Control Register 2 (TSCR2) Module Base + 0x000D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R TOI W Reset 0 0 0 0 TCRE PR2 0 PR1 0 PR0 0 0 0 0 0 = Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-19. Timer System Control Register 2 (TSCR2) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 487 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-13. TSCR2 Field Descriptions Field 7 TOI 3 TCRE Description Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 Interrupt inhibited. 1 Hardware interrupt requested when TOF flag set. Timer Counter Reset Enable — This bit allows the timer counter to be reset by a successful output compare 7 event. This mode of operation is similar to an up-counting modulus counter. 0 Counter reset inhibited and counter free runs. 1 Counter reset by a successful output compare 7. If TC7 = 0x0000 and TCRE = 1, TCNT will stay at 0x0000 continuously. If TC7 = 0xFFFF and TCRE = 1, TOF will never be set when TCNT is reset from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. Timer Prescaler Select — These three bits select the frequency of the timer prescaler clock derived from the Bus Clock as shown in Table 14-14. 2 PR[2:0] Table 14-14. Timer Clock Selection PR2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 PR1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 PR0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Timer Clock Bus Clock / 1 Bus Clock / 2 Bus Clock / 4 Bus Clock / 8 Bus Clock / 16 Bus Clock / 32 Bus Clock / 64 Bus Clock / 128 NOTE The newly selected prescale factor will not take effect until the next synchronized edge where all prescale counter stages equal zero. 14.3.2.12 Main Timer Interrupt Flag 1 (TFLG1) Module Base + 0x000E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R C7F W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6F C5F C4F C3F C2F C1F C0F Figure 14-20. Main Timer Interrupt Flag 1 (TFLG1) Read: Anytime Write: Used in the clearing mechanism (set bits cause corresponding bits to be cleared). Writing a zero will not affect current status of the bit. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 488 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-15. TRLG1 Field Descriptions Field 7:0 C[7:0]F Description Input Capture/Output Compare Channel “x” Flag — These flags are set when an input capture or output compare event occurs. Clearing requires writing a one to the corresponding flag bit while TEN or PAEN is set to one. When TFFCA bit in TSCR register is set, a read from an input capture or a write into an output compare channel (0x0010–0x001F) will cause the corresponding channel flag CxF to be cleared. 14.3.2.13 Main Timer Interrupt Flag 2 (TFLG2) Module Base + 0x000F 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R TOF W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-21. Main Timer Interrupt Flag 2 (TFLG2) TFLG2 indicates when interrupt conditions have occurred. To clear a bit in the flag register, write the bit to one while TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL is set to one. Read: Anytime Write: Used in clearing mechanism (set bits cause corresponding bits to be cleared). Any access to TCNT will clear TFLG2 register if the TFFCA bit in TSCR register is set. Table 14-16. TRLG2 Field Descriptions Field 7 TOF Description Timer Overflow Flag — Set when 16-bit free-running timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. Clearing this bit requires writing a one to bit 7 of TFLG2 register while the TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL is set to one (See also TCRE control bit explanation.) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 489 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.3.2.14 Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Registers High and Low 0–7 (TCxH and TCxL) Module Base + 0x0010 = TC0H 0x0012 = TC1H 0x0014 = TC2H 0x0016 = TC3H 15 14 0x0018 = TC4H 0x001A = TC5H 0x001C = TC6H 0x001E = TC7H 13 12 11 10 9 0 R Bit 15 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Figure 14-22. Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Register x High (TCxH) Module Base + 0x0011 = TC0L 0x0013 = TC1L 0x0015 = TC2L 0x0017 = TC3L 7 6 0x0019 = TC4L 0x001B = TC5L 0x001D = TC6L 0x001F = TC7L 5 4 3 2 1 0 R Bit 7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Figure 14-23. Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Register x Low (TCxL) Depending on the TIOS bit for the corresponding channel, these registers are used to latch the value of the free-running counter when a defined transition is sensed by the corresponding input capture edge detector or to trigger an output action for output compare. Read: Anytime Write: Anytime for output compare function.Writes to these registers have no meaning or effect during input capture. All timer input capture/output compare registers are reset to 0x0000. NOTE Read/Write access in byte mode for high byte should takes place before low byte otherwise it will give a different result. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 490 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.3.2.15 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) Module Base + 0x0020 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 PAEN 0 0 PAMOD 0 PEDGE 0 CLK1 0 CLK0 0 PAOVI 0 PAI 0 Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-24. 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) When PAEN is set, the PACT is enabled.The PACT shares the input pin with IOC7. Read: Any time Write: Any time Table 14-17. PACTL Field Descriptions Field 6 PAEN Description Pulse Accumulator System Enable — PAEN is independent from TEN. With timer disabled, the pulse accumulator can function unless pulse accumulator is disabled. 0 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator system disabled. 1 Pulse Accumulator system enabled. Pulse Accumulator Mode — This bit is active only when the Pulse Accumulator is enabled (PAEN = 1). See Table 14-18. 0 Event counter mode. 1 Gated time accumulation mode. Pulse Accumulator Edge Control — This bit is active only when the Pulse Accumulator is enabled (PAEN = 1). For PAMOD bit = 0 (event counter mode). See Table 14-18. 0 Falling edges on IOC7 pin cause the count to be incremented. 1 Rising edges on IOC7 pin cause the count to be incremented. For PAMOD bit = 1 (gated time accumulation mode). 0 IOC7 input pin high enables M (bus clock) divided by 64 clock to Pulse Accumulator and the trailing falling edge on IOC7 sets the PAIF flag. 1 IOC7 input pin low enables M (bus clock) divided by 64 clock to Pulse Accumulator and the trailing rising edge on IOC7 sets the PAIF flag. Clock Select Bits — Refer to Table 14-19. Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 Interrupt inhibited. 1 Interrupt requested if PAOVF is set. Pulse Accumulator Input Interrupt Enable 0 Interrupt inhibited. 1 Interrupt requested if PAIF is set. 5 PAMOD 4 PEDGE 3:2 CLK[1:0] 1 PAOVI 0 PAI S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 491 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-18. Pin Action PAMOD 0 0 1 1 PEDGE 0 1 0 1 Pin Action Falling edge Rising edge Div. by 64 clock enabled with pin high level Div. by 64 clock enabled with pin low level NOTE If the timer is not active (TEN = 0 in TSCR), there is no divide-by-64 because the ÷64 clock is generated by the timer prescaler. Table 14-19. Timer Clock Selection CLK1 0 0 1 1 CLK0 0 1 0 1 Timer Clock Use timer prescaler clock as timer counter clock Use PACLK as input to timer counter clock Use PACLK/256 as timer counter clock frequency Use PACLK/65536 as timer counter clock frequency For the description of PACLK please refer Figure 14-30. If the pulse accumulator is disabled (PAEN = 0), the prescaler clock from the timer is always used as an input clock to the timer counter. The change from one selected clock to the other happens immediately after these bits are written. 14.3.2.16 Pulse Accumulator Flag Register (PAFLG) Module Base + 0x0021 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAOVF PAIF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unimplemented or Reserved Figure 14-25. Pulse Accumulator Flag Register (PAFLG) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime When the TFFCA bit in the TSCR register is set, any access to the PACNT register will clear all the flags in the PAFLG register. Timer module or Pulse Accumulator must stay enabled (TEN=1 or PAEN=1) while clearing these bits. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 492 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-20. PAFLG Field Descriptions Field 1 PAOVF Description Pulse Accumulator Overflow Flag — Set when the 16-bit pulse accumulator overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. Clearing this bit requires writing a one to this bit in the PAFLG register while TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL register is set to one. Pulse Accumulator Input edge Flag — Set when the selected edge is detected at the IOC7 input pin.In event mode the event edge triggers PAIF and in gated time accumulation mode the trailing edge of the gate signal at the IOC7 input pin triggers PAIF. Clearing this bit requires writing a one to this bit in the PAFLG register while TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL register is set to one. Any access to the PACNT register will clear all the flags in this register when TFFCA bit in register TSCR(0x0006) is set. 0 PAIF 14.3.2.17 Pulse Accumulators Count Registers (PACNT) Module Base + 0x0022 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 R PACNT15 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PACNT14 PACNT13 PACNT12 PACNT11 PACNT10 PACNT9 PACNT8 Figure 14-26. Pulse Accumulator Count Register High (PACNTH) Module Base + 0x0023 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R PACNT7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PACNT6 PACNT5 PACNT4 PACNT3 PACNT2 PACNT1 PACNT0 Figure 14-27. Pulse Accumulator Count Register Low (PACNTL) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime These registers contain the number of active input edges on its input pin since the last reset. When PACNT overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Interrupt flag PAOVF in PAFLG (0x0021) is set. Full count register access should take place in one clock cycle. A separate read/write for high byte and low byte will give a different result than accessing them as a word. NOTE Reading the pulse accumulator counter registers immediately after an active edge on the pulse accumulator input pin may miss the last count because the input has to be synchronized with the bus clock first. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 493 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.3.2.18 Output Compare Pin Disconnect Register(OCPD) Module Base + 0x002C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R OCPD7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OCPD6 OCPD5 OCPD4 OCPD3 OCPD2 OCPD1 OCPD0 Figure 14-28. Ouput Compare Pin Disconnect Register (OCPD) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime All bits reset to zero. Table 14-21. OCPD Field Description Field Description Output Compare Pin Disconnect Bits 0 Enables the timer channel port. Ouptut Compare action will occur on the channel pin. These bits do not affect the input capture or pulse accumulator functions 1 Disables the timer channel port. Output Compare action will not occur on the channel pin, but the output compare flag still become set . OCPD[7:0} 14.3.2.19 Precision Timer Prescaler Select Register (PTPSR) Module Base + 0x002E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R PTPS7 W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTPS6 PTPS5 PTPS4 PTPS3 PTPS2 PTPS1 PTPS0 Figure 14-29. Precision Timer Prescaler Select Register (PTPSR) Read: Anytime Write: Anytime All bits reset to zero. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 494 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Table 14-22. PTPSR Field Descriptions Field 7:0 PTPS[7:0] Description Precision Timer Prescaler Select Bits — These eight bits specify the division rate of the main Timer prescaler. These are effective only when the PRNT bit of TSCR1 is set to 1. Table 14-23 shows some selection examples in this case. The newly selected prescale factor will not take effect until the next synchronized edge where all prescale counter stages equal zero. The Prescaler can be calculated as follows depending on logical value of the PTPS[7:0] and PRNT bit: PRNT = 1 : Prescaler = PTPS[7:0] + 1 Table 14-23. Precision Timer Prescaler Selection Examples when PRNT = 1 PTPS7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 PTPS6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PTPS5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 PTPS4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 PTPS3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 PTPS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PTPS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PTPS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Prescale Factor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 32 64 128 256 14.4 Functional Description This section provides a complete functional description of the timer TIM16B8CV2 block. Please refer to the detailed timer block diagram in Figure 14-30 as necessary. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 495 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description Bus Clock CLK[1:0] PR[2:1:0] PACLK PACLK/256 PACLK/65536 channel 7 output compare MUX TCRE CxI CxF PRESCALER TCNT(hi):TCNT(lo) CLEAR COUNTER 16-BIT COUNTER TE CHANNEL 0 16-BIT COMPARATOR TC0 EDG0A EDG0B EDGE DETECT C0F OM:OL0 TOV0 TOF TOI INTERRUPT LOGIC TOF C0F CH. 0 CAPTURE IOC0 PIN LOGIC CH. 0COMPARE IOC0 PIN IOC0 C1F OM:OL1 TOV1 CH. 1 CAPTURE IOC1 PIN LOGIC CH. 1 COMPARE IOC1 PIN CHANNEL 1 16-BIT COMPARATOR TC1 EDG1A EDG1B EDGE DETECT C1F CHANNEL2 IOC1 CHANNEL7 16-BIT COMPARATOR TC7 EDG7A EDG7B EDGE DETECT C7F OM:OL7 TOV7 C7F CH.7 CAPTURE IOC7 PIN PA INPUT LOGIC CH. 7 COMPARE IOC7 PIN IOC7 PAOVF PACNT(hi):PACNT(lo) PEDGE PAE EDGE DETECT PACLK/65536 PACLK/256 INTERRUPT REQUEST PAOVI PAOVF 16-BIT COUNTER PACLK PAMOD INTERRUPT LOGIC DIVIDE-BY-64 PAI PAIF PAIF Bus Clock PAOVF PAOVI Figure 14-30. Detailed Timer Block Diagram 14.4.1 Prescaler The prescaler divides the bus clock by 1,2,4,8,16,32,64 or 128. The prescaler select bits, PR[2:0], select the prescaler divisor. PR[2:0] are in timer system control register 2 (TSCR2). S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 496 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description The prescaler divides the bus clock by a prescalar value. Prescaler select bits PR[2:0] of in timer system control register 2 (TSCR2) are set to define a prescalar value that generates a divide by 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128 when the PRNT bit in TSCR1 is disabled. By enabling the PRNT bit of the TSCR1 register, the performance of the timer can be enhanced. In this case, it is possible to set additional prescaler settings for the main timer counter in the present timer by using PTPSR[7:0] bits of PTPSR register. 14.4.2 Input Capture Clearing the I/O (input/output) select bit, IOSx, configures channel x as an input capture channel. The input capture function captures the time at which an external event occurs. When an active edge occurs on the pin of an input capture channel, the timer transfers the value in the timer counter into the timer channel registers, TCx. The minimum pulse width for the input capture input is greater than two bus clocks. An input capture on channel x sets the CxF flag. The CxI bit enables the CxF flag to generate interrupt requests. Timer module or Pulse Accumulator must stay enabled (TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL regsiter must be set to one) while clearing CxF (writing one to CxF). 14.4.3 Output Compare Setting the I/O select bit, IOSx, configures channel x as an output compare channel. The output compare function can generate a periodic pulse with a programmable polarity, duration, and frequency. When the timer counter reaches the value in the channel registers of an output compare channel, the timer can set, clear, or toggle the channel pin if the corresponding OCPDx bit is set to zero. An output compare on channel x sets the CxF flag. The CxI bit enables the CxF flag to generate interrupt requests. Timer module or Pulse Accumulator must stay enabled (TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL regsiter must be set to one) while clearing CxF (writing one to CxF). The output mode and level bits, OMx and OLx, select set, clear, toggle on output compare. Clearing both OMx and OLx results in no output compare action on the output compare channel pin. Setting a force output compare bit, FOCx, causes an output compare on channel x. A forced output compare does not set the channel flag. A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a successful output compare on channel 7, overrides output compares on all other output compare channels. The output compare 7 mask register masks the bits in the output compare 7 data register. The timer counter reset enable bit, TCRE, enables channel 7 output compares to reset the timer counter. A channel 7 output compare can reset the timer counter even if the IOC7 pin is being used as the pulse accumulator input. Writing to the timer port bit of an output compare pin does not affect the pin state. The value written is stored in an internal latch. When the pin becomes available for general-purpose output, the last value written to the bit appears at the pin. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 497 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.4.3.1 OC Channel Initialization Internal register whose output drives OCx can be programmed before timer drives OCx. The desired state can be programmed to this Internal register by writing a one to CFORCx bit with TIOSx, OCPDx and TEN bits set to one. Setting OCPDx to zero allows Interal register to drive the programmed state to OCx. This allows a glitch free switch over of port from general purpose I/O to timer output once the OCPDx bit is set to zero. 14.4.4 Pulse Accumulator The pulse accumulator (PACNT) is a 16-bit counter that can operate in two modes: Event counter mode — Counting edges of selected polarity on the pulse accumulator input pin, PAI. Gated time accumulation mode — Counting pulses from a divide-by-64 clock. The PAMOD bit selects the mode of operation. The minimum pulse width for the PAI input is greater than two bus clocks. 14.4.5 Event Counter Mode Clearing the PAMOD bit configures the PACNT for event counter operation. An active edge on the IOC7 pin increments the pulse accumulator counter. The PEDGE bit selects falling edges or rising edges to increment the count. NOTE The PACNT input and timer channel 7 use the same pin IOC7. To use the IOC7, disconnect it from the output logic by clearing the channel 7 output mode and output level bits, OM7 and OL7. Also clear the channel 7 output compare 7 mask bit, OC7M7. The Pulse Accumulator counter register reflect the number of active input edges on the PACNT input pin since the last reset. The PAOVF bit is set when the accumulator rolls over from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. The pulse accumulator overflow interrupt enable bit, PAOVI, enables the PAOVF flag to generate interrupt requests. NOTE The pulse accumulator counter can operate in event counter mode even when the timer enable bit, TEN, is clear. 14.4.6 Gated Time Accumulation Mode Setting the PAMOD bit configures the pulse accumulator for gated time accumulation operation. An active level on the PACNT input pin enables a divided-by-64 clock to drive the pulse accumulator. The PEDGE bit selects low levels or high levels to enable the divided-by-64 clock. The trailing edge of the active level at the IOC7 pin sets the PAIF. The PAI bit enables the PAIF flag to generate interrupt requests. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 498 Freescale Semiconductor Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description The pulse accumulator counter register reflect the number of pulses from the divided-by-64 clock since the last reset. NOTE The timer prescaler generates the divided-by-64 clock. If the timer is not active, there is no divided-by-64 clock. 14.5 Resets The reset state of each individual bit is listed within Section 14.3, “Memory Map and Register Definition” which details the registers and their bit fields. 14.6 Interrupts This section describes interrupts originated by the TIM16B8CV2 block. Table 14-24 lists the interrupts generated by the TIM16B8CV2 to communicate with the MCU. Table 14-24. TIM16B8CV1 Interrupts Interrupt C[7:0]F PAOVI PAOVF TOF 1. Chip Dependent. Offset (1) Vector1 — — — — Priority1 — — — — Source Timer Channel 7–0 Pulse Accumulator Input Pulse Accumulator Overflow Timer Overflow Description Active high timer channel interrupts 7–0 Active high pulse accumulator input interrupt Pulse accumulator overflow interrupt Timer Overflow interrupt — — — — The TIM16B8CV2 uses a total of 11 interrupt vectors. The interrupt vector offsets and interrupt numbers are chip dependent. 14.6.1 Channel [7:0] Interrupt (C[7:0]F) This active high outputs will be asserted by the module to request a timer channel 7 – 0 interrupt to be serviced by the system controller. 14.6.2 Pulse Accumulator Input Interrupt (PAOVI) This active high output will be asserted by the module to request a timer pulse accumulator input interrupt to be serviced by the system controller. 14.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt (PAOVF) This active high output will be asserted by the module to request a timer pulse accumulator overflow interrupt to be serviced by the system controller. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 499 Timer Module (TIM16B8CV2) Block Description 14.6.4 Timer Overflow Interrupt (TOF) This active high output will be asserted by the module to request a timer overflow interrupt to be serviced by the system controller. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 500 Freescale Semiconductor Appendix A Electrical Characteristics A.1 General This supplement contains the most accurate electrical information for the MC9S12P-Family microcontroller available at the time of publication. This introduction is intended to give an overview on several common topics like power supply, current injection etc. A.1.1 Parameter Classification The electrical parameters shown in this supplement are guaranteed by various methods. To give the customer a better understanding the following classification is used and the parameters are tagged accordingly in the tables where appropriate. NOTE This classification is shown in the column labeled “C” in the parameter tables where appropriate. P: C: T: Those parameters are guaranteed during production testing on each individual device. Those parameters are achieved by the design characterization by measuring a statistically relevant sample size across process variations. Those parameters are achieved by design characterization on a small sample size from typical devices under typical conditions unless otherwise noted. All values shown in the typical column are within this category. Those parameters are derived mainly from simulations. D: A.1.2 Power Supply The VDDA, VSSA pin pairs supply the A/D converter and parts of the internal voltage regulator. The VDDX, VSSX pin pairs [2:1] supply the I/O pins. VDDR supplies the internal voltage regulator. All VDDX pins are internally connected by metal. All VSSX pins are internally connected by metal. VDDA, VDDX and VSSA, VSSX are connected by diodes for ESD protection. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 501 Electrical Characteristics NOTE In the following context VDD35 is used for either VDDA, VDDR, and VDDX; VSS35 is used for either VSSA and VSSX unless otherwise noted. IDD35 denotes the sum of the currents flowing into the VDDA, VDDX and VDDR pins. A.1.3 Pins There are four groups of functional pins. A.1.3.1 I/O Pins The I/O pins have a level in the range of 3.15V to 5.5V. This class of pins is comprised of all port I/O pins, the analog inputs, BKGD and the RESET pins. Some functionality may be disabled. A.1.3.2 Analog Reference This group is made up by the VRH and VRL pins. A.1.3.3 Oscillator The pins EXTAL, XTAL dedicated to the oscillator have a nominal 1.8V level. A.1.3.4 TEST This pin is used for production testing only. The TEST pin must be tied to ground in all applications. A.1.4 Current Injection Power supply must maintain regulation within operating VDD35 or VDD range during instantaneous and operating maximum current conditions. If positive injection current (Vin > VDD35) is greater than IDD35, the injection current may flow out of VDD35 and could result in external power supply going out of regulation. Ensure external VDD35 load will shunt current greater than maximum injection current. This will be the greatest risk when the MCU is not consuming power; e.g., if no system clock is present, or if clock rate is very low which would reduce overall power consumption. A.1.5 Absolute Maximum Ratings Absolute maximum ratings are stress ratings only. A functional operation under or outside those maxima is not guaranteed. Stress beyond those limits may affect the reliability or cause permanent damage of the device. This device contains circuitry protecting against damage due to high static voltage or electrical fields; however, it is advised that normal precautions be taken to avoid application of any voltages higher than maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance circuit. Reliability of operation is enhanced if unused inputs are tied to an appropriate logic voltage level (e.g., either VSS35 or VDD35). S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 502 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics Table A-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings(1) Num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rating I/O, regulator and analog supply voltage Voltage difference VDDX to VDDA Voltage difference VSSX to VSSA Digital I/O input voltage Analog reference EXTAL, XTAL Instantaneous maximum current Single pin limit for all digital I/O pins(2) Instantaneous maximum current Single pin limit for EXTAL, XTAL Symbol VDD35 ∆VDDX ∆VSSX VIN VRH, VRL VILV I I D Min –0.3 –6.0 –0.3 –0.3 –0.3 –0.3 –25 –25 –65 Max 6.0 0.3 0.3 6.0 6.0 2.16 +25 +25 155 Unit V V V V V V mA mA °C DL 9 Storage temperature range Tstg 1. Beyond absolute maximum ratings device might be damaged. 2. All digital I/O pins are internally clamped to VSSX and VDDX, or VSSA and VDDA. A.1.6 ESD Protection and Latch-up Immunity All ESD testing is in conformity with CDF-AEC-Q100 stress test qualification for automotive grade integrated circuits. During the device qualification ESD stresses were performed for the Human Body Model (HBM) and the Charge Device Model. A device will be defined as a failure if after exposure to ESD pulses the device no longer meets the device specification. Complete DC parametric and functional testing is performed per the applicable device specification at room temperature followed by hot temperature, unless specified otherwise in the device specification. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 503 Electrical Characteristics Table A-2. ESD and Latch-up Test Conditions Model Human Body Series resistance Storage capacitance Number of pulse per pin Positive Negative Latch-up Minimum input voltage limit Maximum input voltage limit Description Symbol R1 C — — — — Value 1500 100 3 3 –2.5 7.5 V V Unit Ohm pF Table A-3. ESD and Latch-Up Protection Characteristics Num 1 2 3 C C C C Rating Human Body Model (HBM) Charge Device Model (CDM) Latch-up current at TA = 125°C Positive Negative Latch-up current at TA = 27°C Positive Negative Symbol VHBM VCDM ILAT +100 –100 ILAT +200 –200 — — — — mA Min 2000 500 Max — — Unit V V mA 4 C A.1.7 Operating Conditions This section describes the operating conditions of the device. Unless otherwise noted those conditions apply to all the following data. NOTE Please refer to the temperature rating of the device (C, V, M) with regards to the ambient temperature TA and the junction temperature TJ. For power dissipation calculations refer to Section A.1.8, “Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics”. Table A-4. Operating Conditions Rating I/O, regulator and analog supply voltage Voltage difference VDDX to VDDA Voltage difference VDDR to VDDX Voltage difference VSSX to VSSA Voltage difference VSS3 , VSSPLL to VSSX Digital logic supply voltage Symbol VDD35 ∆VDDX ∆VDDR ∆VSSX ∆VSS VDD -0.1 1.72 -0.1 Min 3.13 Typ 5 Max 5.5 Unit V refer to Table A-14 0 0.1 V refer to Table A-14 0 1.8 0.1 1.98 V V S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 504 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics Table A-4. Operating Conditions Oscillator Bus frequency Temperature Option C Operating junction temperature range Operating ambient temperature range(1) Temperature Option V Operating junction temperature range Operating ambient temperature range1 fosc fbus TJ TA TJ TA 4 0.5 –40 –40 –40 –40 — — — 27 — 27 16 32 105 85 °C 125 105 MHz MHz °C Temperature Option M °C Operating junction temperature range TJ –40 — 150 Operating ambient temperature range1 TA –40 27 125 1. Please refer to Section A.1.8, “Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics” for more details about the relation between ambient temperature TA and device junction temperature TJ. NOTE Operation is guaranteed when powering down until low voltage reset assertion. A.1.8 Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics Power dissipation and thermal characteristics are closely related. The user must assure that the maximum operating junction temperature is not exceeded. The average chip-junction temperature (TJ) in °C can be obtained from: T T T J A D = Junction Temperature, [ ° C ] = Ambient Temperature, [ ° C ] = Total Chip Power Dissipation, [W] = Package Thermal Resistance, [ ° C/W] J = T + (P • Θ ) A D JA P Θ JA The total power dissipation can be calculated from: P P D =P INT +P IO INT = Chip Internal Power Dissipation, [W] 2 P = R ⋅I IO DSON IO i i ∑ S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 505 Electrical Characteristics PIO is the sum of all output currents on I/O ports associated with VDDX, whereby R V OL = ----------- ;for outputs driven low DSON I OL R V –V DD 35 OH = -------------------------------------- ;for outputs driven high DSON I OH P INT =I DDR ⋅V DDR +I DDA ⋅V DDA Table A-5. Thermal Package Characteristics(1) Num C Rating QFN 48 1 2 3 4 5 D D D D D Thermal resistance QFN 48, single sided PCB(2) Thermal resistance QFN 48, double sided PCB with 2 internal planes(3) Junction to Board QFN 48 Junction to Case QFN 48 4 Symbol Min Typ Max Unit θJA θJA θJB θJC ΨJT — — — — — — — — — — 82 28 11 1.4 4 °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W °C/W Junction to Case (Bottom) QFN 485 QFP 80 6 7 8 9 10 D D D D D Thermal resistance QFP 80, single sided PCB 2 θJA θJA θJB θJC ΨJT — — — — — — — — — — 56 43 28 19 5 Thermal resistance QFP 80, double sided PCB with 2 internal planes3 Junction to Board QFP 80 Junction to Case QFP 80(4) Junction to Package Top QFP 80(5) LQFP 64 11 12 13 14 D D D D Thermal resistance LQFP 64, single sided PCB2 Thermal resistance LQFP 64, double sided PCB with 2 internal planes3 Junction to Board LQFP 64 Junction to Case LQFP 64(6) (7) θJA θJA θJB θJC — — — — — — — — 70 52 35 17 ΨJT — — 3 °C/W 15 D Junction to Package Top LQFP 64 1. The values for thermal resistance are achieved by package simulations 2. Junction to ambient thermal resistance, θJA was simulated to be equivalent to the JEDEC specification JESD51-2 in a horizontal configuration in natural convection. 3. Junction to ambient thermal resistance, θJA was simulated to be equivalent to the JEDEC specification JESD51-7 in a horizontal configuration in natural convection. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 506 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics 4. Junction to case thermal resistance was simulated to be equivalent to the measured values using the cold plate technique with the cold plate temperature used as the “case” temperature. This basic cold plate measurement technique is described by MILSTD 883D, Method 1012.1. This is the correct thermal metric to use to calculate thermal performance when the package is being used with a heat sink. 5. Thermal characterization parameter ΨJT is the “resistance” from junction to reference point thermocouple on top center of the case as defined in JESD51-2. ΨJT is a useful value to use to estimate junction temperature in a steady state customer enviroment. 6. Junction to case thermal resistance was simulated to be equivalent to the measured values using the cold plate technique with the cold plate temperature used as the “case” temperature. This basic cold plate measurement technique is described by MILSTD 883D, Method 1012.1. This is the correct thermal metric to use to calculate thermal performance when the package is being used with a heat sink. 7. Thermal characterization parameter ΨJT is the “resistance” from junction to reference point thermocouple on top center of the case as defined in JESD51-2. ΨJT is a useful value to use to estimate junction temperature in a steady state customer enviroment. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 507 Electrical Characteristics A.1.9 I/O Characteristics This section describes the characteristics of all I/O pins except EXTAL, XTAL, TEST and supply pins. Table A-6. 3.3-V I/O Characteristics ALL 3.3V RANGE I/O PARAMETERS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE FOLLOWING CHARACTERIZATION Conditions are 3.15 V < VDD35 < 3.6 V junction temperature from –40°C to +150°C, unless otherwise noted I/O Characteristics for all I/O pins except EXTAL, XTAL,TEST and supply pins. Num C 1 P Input high voltage T Input high voltage 2 P Input low voltage T Input low voltage 3 4 C Input hysteresis Input leakage current (pins in high impedance input mode)(1) Vin = VDD35 or VSS35 P M temperature range –40°C to +150°C C V temperature range –40°C to +125°C C C temperature range –40°C to +105°C C Output high voltage (pins in output mode) Partial drive IOH = –0.75 mA P Output high voltage (pins in output mode) Full drive IOH = –4 mA C Output low voltage (pins in output mode) Partial Drive IOL = +0.9 mA P Output low voltage (pins in output mode) Full Drive IOL = +4.75 mA P Internal pull up resistance VIH min > input voltage > VIL max P Internal pull down resistance VIH min > input voltage > VIL max D Input capacitance T Injection current Single pin limit Total device limit, sum of all injected currents P Port J, P interrupt input pulse filtered (STOP)(3) P Port J, P interrupt input pulse passed (STOP) D Port J, P interrupt input pulse filtered (STOP) D Port J, P interrupt input pulse passed (STOP) 3 (2) Rating Symbol VIH VIH VIL VIL VHYS I in Min 0.65*VDD35 — — VSS35 – 0.3 Typ — — — — 250 Max — VDD35 + 0.3 0.35*VDD35 — Unit V V V V mV µA –1.00 -0.75 -0.50 V OH — — — — — — — — — 6 — 1.00 0.75 0.50 — — 0.4 0.4 50 50 — 2.5 25 V V V V KΩ KΩ pF mA 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VDD35 – 0.4 VDD35 – 0.4 — — 25 25 — –2.5 –25 — 10 — 4 VOH VOL V OL RPUL RPDH Cin IICS IICP tPULSE tPULSE tPULSE tPULSE 13 14 15 16 — — — — 3 — 3 — µs µs tcyc tcyc PWIRQ 1 — — tcyc 17 D IRQ pulse width, edge-sensitive mode (STOP) 1. Maximum leakage current occurs at maximum operating temperature. Current decreases by approximately one-half for each 8°C to 12 C in the temperature range from 50°C to 125°C. ° 2. Refer to Section A.1.4, “Current Injection” for more details 3. Parameter only applies in stop or pseudo stop mode. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 508 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics Table A-7. 5-V I/O Characteristics Conditions are 4.5 V < VDD35 < 5.5 V junction temperature from –40°C to +150°C, unless otherwise noted I/O Characteristics for all I/O pins except EXTAL, XTAL,TEST and supply pins. Num C 1 P Input high voltage T Input high voltage 2 P Input low voltage T Input low voltage 3 4 C Input hysteresis Input leakage current (pins in high impedance input mode)(1) Vin = VDD35 or VSS35 P M temperature range –40°C to +150°C C V temperature range –40°C to +125°C C C temperature range –40°C to +105°C C Output high voltage (pins in output mode) Partial drive IOH = –2 mA P Output high voltage (pins in output mode) Full drive IOH = –10 mA C Output low voltage (pins in output mode) Partial drive IOL = +2 mA P Output low voltage (pins in output mode) Full drive IOL = +10 mA P Internal pull up resistance VIH min > input voltage > VIL max P Internal pull down resistance VIH min > input voltage > VIL max D Input capacitance T Injection current Single pin limit Total device Limit, sum of all injected currents P Port J, P interrupt input pulse filtered (STOP)(3) P Port J, P interrupt input pulse passed (STOP) D Port J, P interrupt input pulse filtered (STOP) D Port J, P interrupt input pulse passed (STOP) 3 (2) Rating Symbol V IH Min 0.65*VDD35 — — VSS35 – 0.3 Typ — — — — 250 Max — VDD35 + 0.3 0.35*VDD35 — — Unit V V V V mV µA VIH VIL VIL VHYS I in –1.00 -0.75 -0.50 V OH — — — — — — — — — 6 — 1.00 0.75 0.50 — — 0.8 0.8 50 50 — 2.5 25 V V V V KΩ KΩ pF mA 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VDD35 – 0.8 VDD35 – 0.8 — — 25 25 — –2.5 –25 — 10 — 4 VOH VOL V OL RPUL RPDH Cin IICS IICP tPULSE tPULSE tPULSE tPULSE 13 14 15 16 — — — — 3 — 3 — µs µs tcyc tcyc PWIRQ 1 — — tcyc 17 D IRQ pulse width, edge-sensitive mode (STOP) 1. Maximum leakage current occurs at maximum operating temperature. Current decreases by approximately one-half for each 8°C to 12 C in the temperature range from 50°C to 125°C. ° 2. Refer to Section A.1.4, “Current Injection” for more details 3. Parameter only applies in stop or pseudo stop mode. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 509 Electrical Characteristics A.1.10 Supply Currents This section describes the current consumption characteristics of the device as well as the conditions for the measurements. A.1.10.1 Measurement Conditions Run current is measured on VDDR pin. It does not include the current to drive external loads. Unless otherwise noted the currents are measured in special single chip mode and the CPU code is executed from RAM. For Run and Wait current measurements PLL is on and the reference clock is the IRC1M trimmed to 1MHz. The bus frequency is 32MHz and the CPU frequency is 64MHz. Table A-8., Table A-9. and Table A-10. show the configuration of the CPMU module and the peripherals for Run, Wait and Stop current measurement. Table A-8. CPMU Configuration for Pseudo Stop Current Measurement CPMU REGISTER CPMUCLKS CPMUOSC CPMURTI CPMUCOP Bit settings/Conditions PLLSEL=0, PSTP=1, PRE=PCE=RTIOSCSEL=COPOSCSEL=1 OSCE=1, External Square wave on EXTAL fEXTAL=16MHz, VIH= 1.8V, VIL=0V RTDEC=0, RTR[6:4]=111, RTR[3:0]=1111; WCOP=1, CR[2:0]=111 Table A-9. CPUM Configuration for Run/Wait and Full Stop Current Measurement CPMU REGISTER CPMUSYNR CPMUPOSTDIV CPMUCLKS CPMUOSC Bit settings/Conditions VCOFRQ[1:0]=01,SYNDIV[5:0] = 32 POSTDIV[4:0]=0, PLLSEL=1 OSCE=0, Reference clock for PLL is fref=firc1m trimmed to 1MHz API settings for STOP current measurement CPMUAPICTL CPMUAPITR CPMUAPIRH/RL APIEA=0, APIFE=1, APIE=0 trimmed to 10Khz set to $FFFF S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 510 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics Table A-10. Peripheral Configurations for Run & Wait Current Measurement Peripheral MSCAN SPI SCI PWM ATD Configuration configured to loop-back mode using a bit rate of 1Mbit/s configured to master mode, continously transmit data (0x55 or 0xAA) at 1Mbit/s configured into loop mode, continously transmit data (0x55) at speed of 57600 baud configured to toggle its pins at the rate of 40kHz the peripheral is configured to operate at its maximum specified frequency and to continuously convert voltages on all input channels in sequence. the module is enabled and the comparators are configured to trigger in outside range.The range covers all the code executed by the core. the peripheral shall be configured to output compare mode, pulse accumulator and modulus counter enabled. enabled DBG TIM COP & RTI Table A-11. Run and Wait Current Characteristics Conditions are: VDDR=5.5V, TA=125°C, see Table A-9. and Table A-10. Num 1 2 C P P IDD Run Current IDD Wait Current Rating Symbol IDDR IDDW Min Typ 18 11 Max 20 12 Unit mA mA Table A-12. Full Stop Current Characteristics Conditions are: VDDR=5.5V, API see Table A-9. Num C 150°C -40°C 25°C, 150°C, -40°C 25°C Rating Symbol Stop Current API disabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 P P P C C C IDDS IDDS IDDS Stop Current API enabled IDDS IDDS IDDS 270 20 40 µA µA µA 250 15 25 1100 35 50 µA µA µA Min Typ Max Unit S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 511 Electrical Characteristics Table A-13. Pseudo Stop Current Characteristics Conditions are: VDDR=5.5V, RTI and COP and API enabled, see Table A-8. Num 1 2 3 C C C C 150°C -40°C 25°C Rating Symbol IDDPS IDDPS IDDPS Min Typ 450 175 200 Max Unit µA µA µA A.2 ATD Characteristics This section describes the characteristics of the analog-to-digital converter. A.2.1 ATD Operating Characteristics The Table A-14 and Table A-15 show conditions under which the ATD operates. The following constraints exist to obtain full-scale, full range results: VSSA ≤ VRL ≤ VIN ≤ VRH ≤ VDDA. This constraint exists since the sample buffer amplifier can not drive beyond the power supply levels that it ties to. If the input level goes outside of this range it will effectively be clipped. Table A-14. ATD Operating Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted, supply voltage 3.13 V < VDDA < 5.5 V Num C 1 D Reference potential Low High D Voltage difference VDDX to VDDA D Voltage difference VSSX to VSSA C Differential reference voltage (1) Rating Symbol VRL VRH ∆VDDX ∆VSSX VRH-VRL fATDCLk Min VSSA VDDA/2 –2.35 –0.1 3.13 0.25 0.6 Typ — — 0 0 5.0 Max VDDA/2 VDDA 0.1 0.1 5.5 8.0 Unit V V V V V MHz MHz us 2 3 4 5 6 7 C ATD Clock Frequency (derived from bus clock via the prescaler bus) P ATD Clock Frequency in Stop mode (internal generated temperature and voltage dependent clock, ICLK) D ADC conversion in stop, recovery time(2) ATD Conversion Period(3) 12 bit resolution: D 10 bit resolution: 8 bit resolution: 1 — 1.7 1.5 tATDSTPRC V — 8 NCONV12 NCONV10 NCONV8 20 19 17 42 41 39 ATD clock Cycles 1. Full accuracy is not guaranteed when differential voltage is less than 4.50 V 2. When converting in Stop Mode (ICLKSTP=1) an ATD Stop Recovery time tATDSTPRCV is required to switch back to bus clock based ATDCLK when leaving Stop Mode. Do not access ATD registers during this time. 3. The minimum time assumes a sample time of 4 ATD clock cycles. The maximum time assumes a sample time of 24 ATD clock cycles and the discharge feature (SMP_DIS) enabled, which adds 2 ATD clock cycles. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 512 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.2.2 Factors Influencing Accuracy Source resistance, source capacitance and current injection have an influence on the accuracy of the ATD. A further factor is that PortAD pins that are configured as output drivers switching. A.2.2.1 Port AD Output Drivers Switching PortAD output drivers switching can adversely affect the ATD accuracy whilst converting the analog voltage on other PortAD pins because the output drivers are supplied from the VDDA/VSSA ATD supply pins. Although internal design measures are implemented to minimize the affect of output driver noise, it is recommended to configure PortAD pins as outputs only for low frequency, low load outputs. The impact on ATD accuracy is load dependent and not specified. The values specified are valid under condition that no PortAD output drivers switch during conversion. A.2.2.2 Source Resistance Due to the input pin leakage current as specified in Table A-6 and Table A-7 in conjunction with the source resistance there will be a voltage drop from the signal source to the ATD input. The maximum source resistance RS specifies results in an error (10-bit resolution) of less than 1/2 LSB (2.5 mV) at the maximum leakage current. If device or operating conditions are less than worst case or leakage-induced error is acceptable, larger values of source resistance of up to 10Kohm are allowed. A.2.2.3 Source Capacitance When sampling an additional internal capacitor is switched to the input. This can cause a voltage drop due to charge sharing with the external and the pin capacitance. For a maximum sampling error of the input voltage ≤ 1LSB (10-bit resilution), then the external filter capacitor, Cf ≥ 1024 * (CINS–CINN). A.2.2.4 Current Injection There are two cases to consider. 1. A current is injected into the channel being converted. The channel being stressed has conversion values of $3FF (in 10-bit mode) for analog inputs greater than VRH and $000 for values less than VRL unless the current is higher than specified as disruptive condition. 2. Current is injected into pins in the neighborhood of the channel being converted. A portion of this current is picked up by the channel (coupling ratio K), This additional current impacts the accuracy of the conversion depending on the source resistance. The additional input voltage error on the converted channel can be calculated as: VERR = K * RS * IINJ with IINJ being the sum of the currents injected into the two pins adjacent to the converted channel. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 513 Electrical Characteristics Table A-15. ATD Electrical Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C 1 2 3 4 5 Rating Symbol RS CINN CINS RINA INA Kp Min — — — -2.5 — — Typ — — — 5 — — — Max 1 10 16 15 2.5 1E-4 5E-3 Unit KΩ pF kΩ mA A/A A/A C Max input source resistance(1) D Total input capacitance Non sampling Total input capacitance Sampling D Input internal Resistance C Disruptive analog input current C Coupling ratio positive current injection 6 C Coupling ratio negative current injection Kn 1. 1 Refer to A.2.2.2 for further information concerning source resistance A.2.3 ATD Accuracy Table A-16. and Table A-17. specifies the ATD conversion performance excluding any errors due to current injection, input capacitance and source resistance. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 514 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.2.3.1 ATD Accuracy Definitions For the following definitions see also Figure A-1. Differential non-linearity (DNL) is defined as the difference between two adjacent switching steps. V –V i i–1 DNL ( i ) = -------------------------- – 1 1LSB The integral non-linearity (INL) is defined as the sum of all DNLs: INL ( n ) = i=1 ∑ n V –V n 0 DNL ( i ) = -------------------- – n 1LSB S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 515 Electrical Characteristics DNL Vi-1 $3FF $3FE $3FD $3FC $3FB $3FA $3F9 $3F8 $3F7 $3F6 $3F5 $3F4 10-Bit Resolution $3F3 LSB 10-Bit Absolute Error Boundary Vi 8-Bit Absolute Error Boundary $FF $FE $FD 8-Bit Resolution Vin mV 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 55 60 Ideal Transfer Curve 2 10-Bit Transfer Curve 1 8-Bit Transfer Curve 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 5000 + Figure A-1. ATD Accuracy Definitions NOTE Figure A-1 shows only definitions, for specification values refer to Table A16 and Table A-17. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 516 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics Table A-16. ATD Conversion Performance 5V range Conditions are shown in Table A-4. unless otherwise noted. VREF = VRH - VRL = 5.12V. fATDCLK = 8.0MHz The values are tested to be valid with no PortAD output drivers switching simultaneous with conversions. Num C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 P Resolution P Differential Nonlinearity P Integral Nonlinearity P Absolute Error C Resolution C Differential Nonlinearity C Integral Nonlinearity C Absolute Error2. C Resolution C Differential Nonlinearity C Integral Nonlinearity (2) Rating(1) 12-Bit 12-Bit 12-Bit 12-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit Symbol LSB DNL INL AE LSB DNL INL AE LSB DNL INL Min Typ 1.25 Max Unit mV -4 -5 -7 ±2 ±2.5 ±4 5 4 5 7 counts counts counts mV -1 -2 -3 ±0.5 ±1 ±2 20 ±0.3 ±0.5 1 2 3 counts counts counts mV -0.5 -1 0.5 1 counts counts 8-Bit AE -1.5 ±1 1.5 counts 12 C Absolute Error2. 1. The 8-bit and 10-bit mode operation is structurally tested in production test. Absolute values are tested in 12-bit mode. 2. These values include the quantization error which is inherently 1/2 count for any A/D converter. Table A-17. ATD Conversion Performance 3.3V range Conditions are shown in Table A-4. unless otherwise noted. VREF = VRH - VRL = 3.3V. fATDCLK = 8.0MHz The values are tested to be valid with no PortAD output drivers switching simultaneous with conversions. Num C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 P Resolution P Differential Nonlinearity P Integral Nonlinearity P Absolute Error C Resolution C Differential Nonlinearity C Integral Nonlinearity C Absolute Error C Resolution C Differential Nonlinearity C Integral Nonlinearity 2. 2. (2) Rating(1) 12-Bit 12-Bit 12-Bit 12-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit Symbol LSB DNL INL AE LSB DNL INL AE LSB DNL INL Min Typ 0.80 Max Unit mV -6 -7 -8 ±3 ±3 ±4 3.22 ±1 ±1 ±2 12.89 ±0.3 ±0.5 6 7 8 counts counts counts mV -1.5 -2 -3 1.5 2 3 counts counts counts mV -0.5 -1 0.5 1 counts counts 8-Bit AE -1.5 ±1 1.5 counts 12 C Absolute Error 1. The 8-bit and 10-bit mode operation is structurally tested in production test. Absolute values are tested in 12-bit mode. 2. These values include the quantization error which is inherently 1/2 count for any A/D converter. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 517 Electrical Characteristics A.3 A.3.1 NVM Timing Parameters The time base for all NVM program or erase operations is derived from the bus clock using the FCLKDIV register. The frequency of this derived clock must be set within the limits specified as fNVMOP. The NVM module does not have any means to monitor the frequency and will not prevent program or erase operation at frequencies above or below the specified minimum. When attempting to program or erase the NVM module at a lower frequency, a full program or erase transition is not assured. The following sections provide equations which can be used to determine the time required to execute specific flash commands. All timing parameters are a function of the bus clock frequency, fNVMBUS. All program and erase times are also a function of the NVM operating frequency, fNVMOP. A summary of key timing parameters can be found in Table A-18. A.3.1.1 Erase Verify All Blocks (Blank Check) (FCMD=0x01) The time required to perform a blank check on all blocks is dependent on the location of the first non-blank word starting at relative address zero. It takes one bus cycle per phrase to verify plus a setup of the command. Assuming that no non-blank location is found, then the time to erase verify all blocks is given by: 1 t check = 35500 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS A.3.1.2 Erase Verify Block (Blank Check) (FCMD=0x02) The time required to perform a blank check is dependent on the location of the first non-blank word starting at relative address zero. It takes one bus cycle per phrase to verify plus a setup of the command. Assuming that no non-blank location is found, then the time to erase verify a P-Flash block is given by: 1 t pcheck = 33500 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS Assuming that no non-blank location is found, then the time to erase verify a D-Flash block is given by: 1 t dcheck = 2800 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 518 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.3.1.3 Erase Verify P-Flash Section (FCMD=0x03) The maximum time to erase verify a section of P-Flash depends on the number of phrases being verified (NVP) and is given by: 1 t ≈ ( 450 + N VP ) ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS A.3.1.4 Read Once (FCMD=0x04) The maximum read once time is given by: 1 t = 400 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS A.3.1.5 Program P-Flash (FCMD=0x06) The programming time for a single phrase of four P-Flash words and the two seven-bit ECC fields is dependent on the bus frequency, fNVMBUS, as well as on the NVM operating frequency, fNVMOP. The typical phrase programming time is given by: 1 1 t ppgm ≈ 164 ⋅ ------------------ + 2000 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP The maximum phrase programming time is given by: 1 1 t ppgm ≈ 164 ⋅ ------------------ + 2500 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP A.3.1.6 Program Once (FCMD=0x07) The maximum time required to program a P-Flash Program Once field is given by: 1 1 t ≈ 164 ⋅ ------------------ + 2150 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP A.3.1.7 Erase All Blocks (FCMD=0x08) The time required to erase all blocks is given by: 1 1 t mass ≈ 100100 ⋅ ------------------ + 70000 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 519 Electrical Characteristics A.3.1.8 Erase P-Flash Block (FCMD=0x09) The time required to erase the P-Flash block is given by: 1 1 t pmass ≈ 100100 ⋅ ------------------ + 67000 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP A.3.1.9 Erase P-Flash Sector (FCMD=0x0A) The typical time to erase a 512-byte P-Flash sector is given by: 1 1 t pera ≈ 20020 ⋅ ------------------ + 700 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP The maximum time to erase a 512-byte P-Flash sector is given by: 1 1 t pera ≈ 20020 ⋅ ------------------ + 1400 ⋅ -------------------f NVMOP f NVMBUS A.3.1.10 Unsecure Flash (FCMD=0x0B) The maximum time required to erase and unsecure the Flash is given by: for 128 Kbyte P-Flash and 4 Kbyte D-Flash 1 1 t uns ≈ 100100 ⋅ ------------------ + 70000 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP A.3.1.11 Verify Backdoor Access Key (FCMD=0x0C) The maximum verify backdoor access key time is given by: 1 t = 400 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS A.3.1.12 Set User Margin Level (FCMD=0x0D) The maximum set user margin level time is given by: 1 t = 350 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 520 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.3.1.13 Set Field Margin Level (FCMD=0x0E) The maximum set field margin level time is given by: 1 t = 350 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS A.3.1.14 Erase Verify D-Flash Section (FCMD=0x10) The time required to Erase Verify D-Flash for a given number of words NW is given by: 1 t dcheck ≈ ( 450 + N W ) ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS A.3.1.15 Program D-Flash (FCMD=0x11) D-Flash programming time is dependent on the number of words being programmed and their location with respect to a row boundary since programming across a row boundary requires extra steps. The DFlash programming time is specified for different cases: 1,2,3,4 words and 4 words across a row boundary. The typical D-Flash programming time is given by the following equation, where NW denotes the number of words; BC=0 if no row boundary is crossed and BC=1 if a row boundary is crossed: 1 1 t dpgm ≈ ⎛ ( 14 + ( 54 ⋅ N W ) + ( 14 ⋅ BC ) ) ⋅ ------------------ ⎞ + ⎛ ( 500 + ( 525 ⋅ N W ) + ( 100 ⋅ BC ) ) ⋅ -------------------- ⎞ ⎝ f NVMOP ⎠ ⎝ f NVMBUS ⎠ The maximum D-Flash programming time is given by: 1 1 t dpgm ≈ ⎛ ( 14 + ( 54 ⋅ N W ) + ( 14 ⋅ BC ) ) ⋅ ------------------ ⎞ + ⎛ ( 500 + ( 750 ⋅ N W ) + ( 100 ⋅ BC ) ) ⋅ -------------------- ⎞ ⎝ f NVMOP ⎠ ⎝ f NVMBUS ⎠ A.3.1.16 Erase D-Flash Sector (FCMD=0x12) Typical D-Flash sector erase times, expected on a new device where no margin verify fails occur, is given by: 1 1 t dera ≈ 5025 ⋅ ------------------ + 700 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP Maximum D-Flash sector erase times is given by: 1 1 t dera ≈ 20100 ⋅ ------------------ + 3400 ⋅ -------------------f NVMBUS f NVMOP S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 521 Electrical Characteristics The D-Flash sector erase time is ~5ms on a new device and can extend to ~20ms as the flash is cycled. Table A-18. NVM Timing Characteristics (FTMRC) Num C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12a 12b 12c 12d 12e Bus frequency Operating frequency Rating Symbol fNVMBUS fNVMOP tmass tcheck tuns tpmass tpcheck tpera tppgm tdera tdcheck tdpgm1 tdpgm2 tdpgm3 tdpgm4 Min 1 0.8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — Typ(1) — 1.0 100 — 100 100 — 20 226 5 (4) Max(2) 32 1.05 130 35500 130 130 33500 26 285 26 2800 107 185 262 339 357 Unit(3) MHz MHz ms tcyc ms ms tcyc ms µs ms tcyc µs µs µs µs µs D Erase all blocks (mass erase) time D Erase verify all blocks (blank check) time D Unsecure Flash time D P-Flash block erase time D P-Flash erase verify (blank check) time D P-Flash sector erase time D P-Flash phrase programming time D D-Flash sector erase time D D-Flash erase verify (blank check) time D D-Flash one word programming time D D-Flash two word programming time D D-Flash three word programming time D D-Flash four word programming time — 100 170 241 311 328 — D D-Flash four word programming time crossing row tdpgm4c boundary 1. Typical program and erase times are based on typical fNVMOP and maximum fNVMBUS 2. Maximum program and erase times are based on minimum fNVMOP and maximum fNVMBUS 3. tcyc = 1 / fNVMBUS 4. Typical value for a new device A.3.2 NVM Reliability Parameters The reliability of the NVM blocks is guaranteed by stress test during qualification, constant process monitors and burn-in to screen early life failures. The data retention and program/erase cycling failure rates are specified at the operating conditions noted. The program/erase cycle count on the sector is incremented every time a sector or mass erase event is executed. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 522 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics NOTE All values shown in Table A-19 are preliminary and subject to further characterization. Table A-19. NVM Reliability Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C Rating Program Flash Arrays 1 2 C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C(1) after up to 10,000 program/erase cycles C Program Flash number of program/erase cycles (-40°C ≤ tj ≤ 150°C) Data Flash Array 3 4 5 C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1 after up to 50,000 program/erase cycles C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1 after up to 10,000 program/erase cycles C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1 after less than 100 program/erase cycles tNVMRET tNVMRET tNVMRET 5 10 20 1002 1002 1002 — — — Years Years Years tNVMRET nFLPE 20 10K 100(2) 100K(3) — — Years Cycles Symbol Min Typ Max Unit 6 C Data Flash number of program/erase cycles (-40°C ≤ tj ≤ 150°C) nFLPE 50K 500K3 — Cycles 1. TJavg does not exceed 85°C in a typical temperature profile over the lifetime of a consumer, industrial or automotive application. 2. Typical data retention values are based on intrinsic capability of the technology measured at high temperature and de-rated to 25°C using the Arrhenius equation. For additional information on how Freescale defines Typical Data Retention, please refer to Engineering Bulletin EB618 3. Spec table quotes typical endurance evaluated at 25°C for this product family. For additional information on how Freescale defines Typical Endurance, please refer to Engineering Bulletin EB619. A.4 A.4.1 Phase Locked Loop Jitter Definitions With each transition of the feedback clock, the deviation from the reference clock is measured and input voltage to the VCO is adjusted accordingly.The adjustment is done continuously with no abrupt changes in the VCOCLK frequency. Noise, voltage, temperature and other factors cause slight variations in the control loop resulting in a clock jitter. This jitter affects the real minimum and maximum clock periods as illustrated in Figure A-2. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 523 Electrical Characteristics 0 1 2 3 N-1 N tmin1 tnom tmax1 tminN tmaxN Figure A-2. Jitter Definitions The relative deviation of tnom is at its maximum for one clock period, and decreases towards zero for larger number of clock periods (N). Defining the jitter as: t (N) t (N) ⎞ ⎛ max min J ( N ) = max ⎜ 1 – ---------------------- , 1 – ---------------------- ⎟ N⋅t N⋅t ⎝ nom nom ⎠ For N < 100, the following equation is a good fit for the maximum jitter: j 1 J ( N ) = ------N J(N) 1 5 10 20 N Figure A-3. Maximum Bus Clock Jitter Approximation NOTE On timers and serial modules a prescaler will eliminate the effect of the jitter to a large extent. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 524 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.4.2 Electrical Characteristics for the PLL Table A-20. PLL Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C 1 2 3 4 6 7 Rating Symbol fVCORST fVCO fREF |∆Lock| |∆unl| tlock Min 8 32 1 0 0.5 1.5 2.5 150 + 256/fREF Typ Max 32 64 Unit MHz MHz MHz %(1) %1 µs D VCO frequency during system reset C VCO locking range C Reference Clock D Lock Detection D Un-Lock Detection C Time to lock j1 8 C Jitter fit parameter 1(2) 1.4 % 1. % deviation from target frequency 2. fREF = 4MHz oscillator, fBUS = 32MHz equivalent fPLL = 64MHz, CPMUREFDIV=$40, CPMUSYNR=$47, CPMUPOSTDIV=$00 A.5 Electrical Characteristics for the IRC1M Table A-21. IRC1M Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C 1 Rating Symbol fIRC1M_TRIM Min 0.985 Typ 1 Max 1.015 Unit MHz P Junction Temperature -40°C to 150°C Internal Reference Frequency, factory trimmed S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 525 Electrical Characteristics A.6 Electrical Characteristics for the Oscillator (OSCLCP) Table A-22. OSCLCP Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C 1 2 3a 3b 3c 4 5 6 7 Rating Symbol fOSC iOSC tUPOSC tUPOSC tUPOSC fCMFA CIN VHYS,EXTAL Min 4.0 100 — — — 200 Typ Max 16 Unit MHz µA C Crystal oscillator range P Startup Current C Oscillator start-up time (LCP, 4MHz)(1) C Oscillator start-up time (LCP, 8MHz)1 C Oscillator start-up time (LCP, 16MHz)1 P Clock Monitor Failure Assert Frequency D Input Capacitance (EXTAL, XTAL pins) C EXTAL Pin Input Hysteresis C 2 1.6 1 400 7 10 8 5 1000 ms ms ms KHz pF — 180 — mV EXTAL Pin oscillation amplitude (loop — — VPP,EXTAL 0.9 V controlled Pierce) 1. These values apply for carefully designed PCB layouts with capacitors that match the crystal/resonator requirements. A.7 Reset Characteristics Table A-23. Reset and Stop & Startup Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C 1 2 3 Rating Symbol PWRSTL nRST tSTP_REC Min 2 768 50 Typ Max Unit tVCORS T C Reset input pulse width, minimum input time C Startup from Reset C STOP recovery time tVCORS T µs S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 526 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.8 Electrical Specification for Voltage Regulator Table A-24. IVREG Characteristics Num 1 2 3 4 5 C P P P T C Characteristic Input Voltages VDDA Low Voltage Interrupt Assert Level (1) VDDA Low Voltage Interrupt Deassert Level VDDX Low Voltage Reset Deassert (2) (3) API ACLK frequency (APITR[5:0] = %000000) Trimmed API internal clock(4) ∆f / fnominal The first period after enabling the counter by APIFE might be reduced by API start up delay Temperature Sensor Slope Symbol VVDDR,A VLVIA VLVID VLVRXD fACLK dfACLK tsdel Min 3.13 4.04 4.19 — — - 5% Typical — 4.23 4.38 — 10 — Max 5.5 4.40 4.49 3.13 — + 5% Unit V V V V KHz — 6 D — — 100 us mV/ oC 7 T dVTS 4.0 5.5 6.5 High Temperature Interrupt Assert THTIA 125 oC (CPMUHTTR=$88)(5) 105 8 T THTID High Temperature Interrupt Deassert (CPMUHTTR=$88) 1. Monitors VDDA, active only in Full Performance Mode. Indicates I/O & ADC performance degradation due to low supply voltage. 2. Device functionality is guaranteed on power down to the LVR assert level 3. Monitors VDDX, active only in Full Performance Mode. MCU is monitored by the POR in RPM (see Figure A-4) 4. The API Trimming APITR[5:0] bits must be set so that fACLK=10KHz. 5. A hysteresis is guaranteed by design NOTE The LVR monitors the voltages VDD, VDDF and VDDX. As soon as voltage drops on these supplies which would prohibit the correct function of the microcontroller, the LVR is triggering a reset. A.9 Chip Power-up and Voltage Drops LVI (low voltage interrupt), POR (power-on reset) and LVRs (low voltage reset) handle chip power-up or drops of the supply voltage. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 527 Electrical Characteristics Figure A-4. MC9S12P-Family - Chip Power-up and Voltage Drops (not scaled) V VLVID VLVIA VLVRD VLVRA VDDA/VDDX VDD VPORD t LVI LVI enabled POR LVI disabled due to LVR LVR S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 528 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics A.10 MSCAN Table A-25. MSCAN Wake-up Pulse Characteristics Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted Num C 1 2 Rating Symbol tWUP tWUP Min — 5 Typ — — Max 1.5 — Unit µs µs P MSCAN wakeup dominant pulse filtered P MSCAN wakeup dominant pulse pass A.11 SPI Timing This section provides electrical parametrics and ratings for the SPI. In Table A-26 the measurement conditions are listed. Table A-26. Measurement Conditions Description Drive mode Load capacitance CLOAD(1), on all outputs Thresholds for delay measurement points 1. Timing specified for equal load on all SPI output pins. Avoid asymmetric load. Value Full drive mode 50 (20% / 80%) VDDX Unit — pF V A.11.1 Master Mode In Figure A-5 the timing diagram for master mode with transmission format CPHA = 0 is depicted. SS (Output) 2 SCK (CPOL = 0) (Output) SCK (CPOL = 1) (Output) 5 MISO (Input) 6 Bit MSB-1. . . 1 9 Bit MSB-1. . . 1 LSB OUT LSB IN 11 1 4 4 12 13 12 13 3 MSB IN2 10 MOSI (Output) MSB OUT2 1. If configured as an output. 2. LSBF = 0. For LSBF = 1, bit order is LSB, bit 1, bit 2... MSB. Figure A-5. SPI Master Timing (CPHA = 0) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 529 Electrical Characteristics In Figure A-6 the timing diagram for master mode with transmission format CPHA=1 is depicted. SS (Output) 1 2 SCK (CPOL = 0) (Output) 4 SCK (CPOL = 1) (Output) 5 MISO (Input) 9 MOSI (Output) Port Data Master MSB OUT2 6 Bit MSB-1. . . 1 11 Bit MSB-1. . . 1 Master LSB OUT Port Data LSB IN MSB IN2 4 12 13 12 13 3 1.If configured as output 2. LSBF = 0. For LSBF = 1, bit order is LSB, bit 1,bit 2... MSB. Figure A-6. SPI Master Timing (CPHA = 1) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 530 Freescale Semiconductor Electrical Characteristics In Table A-27 the timing characteristics for master mode are listed. Table A-27. SPI Master Mode Timing Characteristics Num 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 C D D D D D D D D D D D D SCK period Enable lead time Enable lag time Clock (SCK) high or low time Data setup time (inputs) Data hold time (inputs) Data valid after SCK edge Data valid after SS fall (CPHA = 0) Data hold time (outputs) Rise and fall time inputs Rise and fall time outputs Characteristic SCK frequency Symbol fsck tsck tlead tlag twsck tsu thi tvsck tvss tho trfi trfo Min 1/2048 2 — — — 8 8 — — 20 — — Typ — — 1/2 1/2 1/2 — — — — — — — Max 1/2 2048 — — — — — 29 15 — 8 8 Unit fbus tbus tsck tsck tsck ns ns ns ns ns ns ns A.11.2 Slave Mode In Figure A-7 the timing diagram for slave mode with transmission format CPHA = 0 is depicted. SS (Input) 1 SCK (CPOL = 0) (Input) 2 SCK (CPOL = 1) (Input) 10 7 MISO (Output) See Note 5 MOSI (Input) NOTE: Not defined MSB IN Slave MSB 6 Bit MSB-1. . . 1 LSB IN 9 Bit MSB-1 . . . 1 4 4 12 13 8 11 11 See Note 12 13 3 Slave LSB OUT Figure A-7. SPI Slave Timing (CPHA = 0) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 531 Electrical Characteristics In Figure A-8 the timing diagram for slave mode with transmission format CPHA = 1 is depicted. SS (Input) 1 2 SCK (CPOL = 0) (Input) 4 SCK (CPOL = 1) (Input) 9 MISO (Output) See Note 7 MOSI (Input) NOTE: Not defined Slave 5 MSB OUT 6 MSB IN Bit MSB-1 . . . 1 LSB IN 4 12 13 12 13 3 11 Bit MSB-1 . . . 1 Slave LSB OUT 8 Figure A-8. SPI Slave Timing (CPHA = 1) In Table A-28 the timing characteristics for slave mode are listed. Table A-28. SPI Slave Mode Timing Characteristics Num 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C D D D D D D D D D D D D D Characteristic SCK frequency SCK period Enable lead time Enable lag time Clock (SCK) high or low time Data setup time (inputs) Data hold time (inputs) Slave access time (time to data active) Slave MISO disable time Data valid after SCK edge Data valid after SS fall Data hold time (outputs) Rise and fall time inputs Symbol fsck tsck tlead tlag twsck tsu thi ta tdis tvsck tvss tho trfi trfo Min DC 4 4 4 4 8 8 — — — — 20 — — Typ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Max 1/4 ∞ — — — — — 20 22 29 + 0.5 ⋅ tbus(1) tbus1 Unit fbus tbus tbus tbus tbus ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 29 + 0.5 ⋅ — 8 8 13 D Rise and fall time outputs 1. 0.5 tbus added due to internal synchronization delay S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 532 Freescale Semiconductor Ordering Information Appendix B Ordering Information The following figure provides an ordering partnumber example for the devices covered by this data book. There are two options when ordering a device. Customers must choose between ordering either the maskspecific partnumber or the generic / mask-independent partnumber. Ordering the mask-specific partnumber enables the customer to specify which particular maskset they will receive whereas ordering the generic maskset means that FSL will ship the currently preferred maskset (which may change over time). In either case, the marking on the device will always show the generic / mask-independent partnumber and the mask set number. NOTE The mask identifier suffix and the Tape & Reel suffix are always both omitted from the partnumber which is actually marked on the device. For specific partnumbers to order, please contact your local sales office. The below figure illustrates the structure of a typical mask-specific ordering number for the MC9S12P-Family devices S 9 S12 P128 J0 M FT R Tape & Reel: R = Tape & Reel No R = No Tape & Reel Package Option: FT = 48 QFN LH = 64 LQFP QK = 80 QFP Temperature Option: C = -40˚C to 85˚C V = -40˚C to 105˚C M = -40˚C to 125˚C Maskset identifier Suffix: First digit usually references wafer fab Second digit usually differentiates mask rev (This suffix is omitted in generic partnumbers) Device Title Controller Family Main Memory Type: 9 = Flash 3 = ROM (if available) Status / Partnumber type: S or SC = Maskset specific partnumber MC = Generic / mask-independent partnumber P or PC = prototype status (pre qualification) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 533 Ordering Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 534 Freescale Semiconductor Package Information Appendix C Package Information This section provides the physical dimensions of the MC9S12P-Family packages. NOTE The exposed pad of the 48 QFN package should be attached to Vss ground plane. S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 535 Package Information C.1 80 QFP Package Mechanical Outline S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 536 Freescale Semiconductor Package Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 537 Package Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 538 Freescale Semiconductor Package Information C.2 48 QFN Package Mechanical Outline S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 539 Package Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 540 Freescale Semiconductor Package Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 541 Package Information C.3 64 LQFP Package Mechanical Outline S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 542 Freescale Semiconductor Package Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 543 Package Information S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 544 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map Appendix D Detailed Register Address Map D.1 Detailed Register Map The following tables show the detailed register map of the MC9S12P-Family. 0x0000-0x0009 Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 1 of 4 Address 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 0x0006 0x0007 0x0008 0x0009 Name PORTA PORTB DDRA DDRB Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved PORTE DDRE R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 PA7 PB7 DDRA7 DDRB7 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 PA6 PB6 DDRA6 DDRB6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 PA5 PB5 DDRA5 DDRB5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 PA4 PB4 DDRA4 DDRB4 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 PA3 PB3 DDRA3 DDRB3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 PA2 PB2 DDRA2 DDRB2 0 0 0 0 Bit 1 PA1 PB1 DDRA1 DDRB1 0 0 0 0 PE1 0 Bit 0 PA0 PB0 DDRA0 DDRB0 0 0 0 0 PE0 0 PE7 DDRE7 PE6 DDRE6 PE5 DDRE5 PE4 DDRE4 PE3 DDRE3 PE2 DDRE2 0x000A-0x000B Module Mapping Conrol (MMC) Map 1 of 2 Address 0x000A 0x000B Name Reserved MODE R W R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 Bit 0 0 0 MODC S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 545 Detailed Register Address Map 0x000C-0x000D Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 2 of 4 Address 0x000C 0x000D Name PUCR RDRIV R W R W Bit 7 0 0 Bit 6 BKPUE 0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 PUPEE RDPE Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 Bit 1 PUPBE RDPB Bit 0 PUPAE RDPA 0x000E-0x000F Reserved Address 0x000E 0x000F Name Reserved Reserved R W R W Bit 7 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 Bit 0 0 0 0x0010-0x0017 Module Mapping Control (MMC) Map 2 of 2 Address 0x0010 0x0011 0x0012 0x0013 0x0014 0x0015 0x0016 0x0017 Name Reserved DIRECT Reserved Reserved Reserved PPAGE Reserved Reserved R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 DP15 0 0 0 DP14 0 0 0 DP13 0 0 0 DP12 0 0 0 DP11 0 0 0 DP10 0 0 0 DP9 0 0 0 DP8 0 0 0 PIX7 0 0 PIX6 0 0 PIX5 0 0 PIX4 0 0 PIX3 0 0 PIX2 0 0 PIX1 0 0 PIX0 0 0 0x0018-0x0019 Reserved Address 0x0018 0x0019 Name Reserved Reserved R W R W Bit 7 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 Bit 0 0 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 546 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x001A-0x001B Part ID Registers Address 0x001A 0x001B Name PARTIDH PARTIDL R W R W Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PARTIDH PARTIDL 0x001C-0x001F Port Intergartion Module (PIM) Map 3 of 4 Address 0x001C 0x001D Name ECLKCTL Reserved R W R W R W R W Bit 7 NECLK 0 Bit 6 NCLKX2 0 Bit 5 DIV16 0 0 0 Bit 4 EDIV4 0 0 0 Bit 3 EDIV3 0 0 0 Bit 2 EDIV2 0 0 0 Bit 1 EDIV1 0 0 0 Bit 0 EDIV0 0 0 0 0x001E 0x001F IRQCR Reserved IRQE 0 IRQEN 0 0x0020-0x002F Debug Module (S12SDBG) Map Address 0x0020 0x0021 0x0022 0x0023 0x0024 0x0025 0x0026 0x0027 0x0027 0x0028 (1) Name DBGC1 DBGSR DBGTCR DBGC2 DBGTBH DBGTBL DBGCNT DBGSCRX DBGMFR DBGACTL DBGBCTL R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 ARM TBF 0 0 Bit 15 Bit 7 TBF 0 0 Bit 6 0 TRIG 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 4 BDM 0 0 0 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 3 DBGBRK 0 Bit 2 0 SSF2 Bit 1 Bit 0 COMRV SSF1 0 SSF0 TSOURCE 0 Bit 14 Bit 6 0 0 0 TRCMOD 0 Bit 11 Bit 3 CNT 0 Bit 10 Bit 2 TALIGN ABCM Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 8 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 SC3 0 SC2 MC2 SC1 MC1 0 0 SC0 MC0 SZE SZE SZ SZ TAG TAG BRK BRK RW RW RWE RWE COMPE COMPE 0x0028 (2) S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 547 Detailed Register Address Map 0x0020-0x002F Debug Module (S12SDBG) Map Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 COMPE Bit 16 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 R 0 0 0x0028 DBGCCTL TAG BRK RW RWE (3) W R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x0029 DBGXAH W R 0x002A DBGXAM Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 W R 0x002B DBGXAL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 W R 0x002C DBGADH Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 W R 0x002D DBGADL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 W R 0x002E DBGADHM Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 W R 0x002F DBGADLM Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 W 1. This represents the contents if the Comparator A or C control register is blended into this address 2. This represents the contents if the Comparator B or D control register is blended into this address 3. This represents the contents if the Comparator B or D control register is blended into this address 17 9 1 9 1 9 1 0x0030-0x0033 Reserved Address 0x0030 0x0031 0x0032 0x0033 Name Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved R W R W R W R W Bit 7 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0x0034-0x003F Clock Reset and Power Management (CPMU) Map Address 0x0034 Name CPMUSYNR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 R W R 0x0035 CPMUREFDIV W CPMUPOSTDI R 0x0036 V W R 0x0037 CPMUFLG W VCOFRQ[1:0] REFFRQ[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 SYNDIV[5:0] REFDIV[3:0] POSTDIV[4:0] LOCKIF LOCK ILAF OSCIF UPOSC RTIF PORF LVRF S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 548 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x0034-0x003F Clock Reset and Power Management (CPMU) Map Address 0x0038 0x0039 0x003A 0x003B Name CPMUINT CPMUCLKS CPMUPLL CPMURTI Bit 7 R RTIE W R PLLSEL W R 0 W R W R W R W R W R W RTDEC Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 LOCKIE 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 OSCIE RTIOSCS EL 0 Bit 0 0 COPOSC SEL 0 PSTP 0 PRE 0 PCE 0 FM1 RTR5 0 WRTMAS K 0 0 0 5 FM0 RTR4 0 RTR6 RTR3 0 RTR2 RTR1 RTR0 0x003C CPMUCOP WCOP 0 0 0 Bit 7 RSBCK 0 0 0 6 CR2 0 0 Reserved For Factory Test 0 Reserved For Factory Test 0 0 4 3 0 0 0 2 CR1 0 0 0 1 CR0 0 0 0 Bit 0 0x003D 0x003E 0x003F Reserved Reserved CPMU ARMCOP 0x0040-0x006F Timer Module (TIM) Map Address 0x0040 0x0041 0x0042 0x0043 0x0044 0x0045 0x0046 0x0047 0x0048 0x0049 0x004A 0x004B Name TIOS CFORC OC7M OC7D TCNTH TCNTL TSCR1 TTOV TCTL1 TCTL2 TCTL3 TCTL4 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 IOS7 0 FOC7 OC7M7 OC7D7 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 6 IOS6 0 FOC6 OC7M6 OC7D6 14 6 Bit 5 IOS5 0 FOC5 OC7M5 OC7D5 13 5 Bit 4 IOS4 0 FOC4 OC7M4 OC7D4 12 4 Bit 3 IOS3 0 FOC3 OC7M3 OC7D3 11 3 Bit 2 IOS2 0 FOC2 OC7M2 OC7D2 10 2 0 Bit 1 IOS1 0 FOC1 OC7M1 OC7D1 9 1 0 Bit 0 IOS0 0 FOC0 OC7M0 OC7D0 Bit 8 Bit 0 0 TEN TOV7 OM7 OM3 EDG7B EDG3B TSWAI TOV6 OL7 OL3 EDG7A EDG3A TSFRZ TOV5 OM6 OM2 EDG6B EDG2B TFFCA TOV4 OL6 OL2 EDG6A EDG2A PRNT TOV3 OM5 OM1 EDG5B EDG1B TOV2 OL5 OL1 EDG5A EDG1A TOV1 OM4 OM0 EDG4B EDG0B TOV0 OL4 OL0 EDG4A EDG0A S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 549 Detailed Register Address Map 0x0040-0x006F Timer Module (TIM) Map Address 0x004C 0x004D 0x004E 0x004F 0x0050 0x0051 0x0052 0x0053 0x0054 0x0055 0x0056 0x0057 0x0058 0x0059 0x005A 0x005B 0x005C 0x005D 0x005E 0x005F 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 Name TIE TSCR2 TFLG1 TFLG2 TC0H TC0L TC1H TC1L TC2H TC2L TC3H TC3L TC4H TC4L TC5H TC5L TC6H TC6L TC7H TC7L PACTL PAFLG PACNTH Bit 7 R C7I W R TOI W R C7F W R TOF W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R Bit 15 W R Bit 7 W R 0 W R 0 W R PACNT15 W Bit 6 C6I 0 Bit 5 C5I 0 Bit 4 C4I 0 Bit 3 C3I TCRE C3F 0 Bit 2 C2I PR2 C2F 0 Bit 1 C1I PR1 C1F 0 Bit 0 C0I PR0 C0F 0 C6F 0 C5F 0 C4F 0 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 PAEN 0 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 PAMOD 0 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 PEDGE 0 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 CLK1 0 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 CLK0 0 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 PAOVI PAOVF PACNT9 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 PAI PAIF PACNT8 PACNT14 PACNT13 PACNT12 PACNT11 PACNT10 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 550 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x0040-0x006F Timer Module (TIM) Map Address 0x0063 0x0064– 0x006B 0x006C 0x006D 0x006E 0x006F Name PACNTL Reserved OCPD Reserved PTPSR Reserved Bit 7 R PACNT7 W R 0 W R OCPD7 W R W R PTPS7 W R 0 W Bit 6 PACNT6 0 Bit 5 PACNT5 0 Bit 4 PACNT4 0 Bit 3 PACNT3 0 Bit 2 PACNT2 0 Bit 1 PACNT1 0 Bit 0 PACNT0 0 OCPD6 OCPD5 OCPD4 OCPD3 OCPD2 OCPD1 OCPD0 PTPS6 0 PTPS5 0 PTPS4 0 PTPS3 0 PTPS2 0 PTPS1 0 PTPS0 0 0x0070-0x009F Analog to Digital Converter 12-Bit 10-Channel (ATD) Map Address 0x0070 0x0071 0x0072 0x0073 0x0074 0x0075 0x0076 0x0077 0x0078 0x0079 0x007A 0x007B 0x007C 0x007D Name ATDCTL0 ATDCTL1 ATDCTL2 ATDCTL3 ATDCTL4 ATDCTL5 ATDSTAT0 Reserved ATDCMPEH ATDCMPEL ATDSTAT2H ATDSTAT2L ATDDIENH ATDDIENL R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 0 ETRIG SEL 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 WRAP3 ETRIG CH3 ETRIGP S1C PRS3 CD CC3 0 0 Bit 2 WRAP2 ETRIG CH2 ETRIGE FIFO PRS2 CC CC2 0 0 Bit 1 WRAP1 ETRIG CH1 ASCIE FRZ1 PRS1 CB CC1 0 Bit 0 WRAP0 ETRIG CH0 ACMPIE FRZ0 PRS0 CA CC0 0 SRES1 AFFC S8C SMP1 SC 0 0 0 SRES0 ICLKSTP S4C SMP0 SCAN ETORF 0 0 SMP_DIS ETRIGLE S2C PRS4 MULT FIFOR 0 0 DJM SMP2 0 SCF 0 0 CMPE[9:8] CMPE[7:0] CCF[9:8] CCF[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 IEN[9:8] IEN[7:0] S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 551 Detailed Register Address Map 0x0070-0x009F Analog to Digital Converter 12-Bit 10-Channel (ATD) Map Address 0x007E 0x007F 0x0080 0x0081 0x0082 0x0083 0x0084 0x0085 0x0086 0x0087 0x0088 0x0089 0x008A 0x008B 0x008C 0x008D 0x008E 0x008F 0x090 0x091 0x092 0x093 0x094 Name R ATDCMPHTH W R ATDCMPHTL W R ATDDR0H W R ATDDR0L W R ATDDR1H W R ATDDR1L W R ATDDR2H W R ATDDR2L W R ATDDR3H W R ATDDR3L W R ATDDR4H W R ATDDR4L W R ATDDR5H W R ATDDR5L W R ATDDR6H W R ATDDR6L W R ATDDR7H W R ATDDR7L W R ATDDR8H W R ATDDR8L W R ATDDR9H W R ATDDR9L W R ATDDR10H W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 CMPHT[9:8] CMPHT[7:0] Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 552 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x0070-0x009F Analog to Digital Converter 12-Bit 10-Channel (ATD) Map Address 0x095 0x096 0x097 0x098 0x099 0x09A 0x09B 0x09C 0x09D 0x09E 0x009F Name ATDDR10L ATDDR11H ATDDR11L ATDDR12H ATDDR12L ATDDR13H ATDDR13L ATDDR14H ATDDR14L ATDDR15H ATDDR15L R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit 6 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 14 Bit6 Bit 5 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 0 Bit 4 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 Bit 3 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 Bit 2 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 Bit 1 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 Bit 0 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 Bit8 0 0x00A0-0x00C7 Pulse Width Modulator 6-Channels (PWM) Map Address 0x00A0 0x00A1 0x00A2 0x00A3 0x00A4 0x00A5 0x00A6 0x00A7 0x00A8 Name PWME PWMPOL PWMCLK PWMPRCLK PWMCAE PWMCTL PWMTST Test Only PWMPRSC PWMSCLA R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 0 0 Bit 5 PWME5 PPOL5 PCLK5 PCKB1 CAE5 CON23 0 0 Bit 4 PWME4 PPOL4 PCLK4 PCKB0 CAE4 CON01 0 0 Bit 3 PWME3 PPOL3 PCLK3 0 Bit 2 PWME2 PPOL2 PCLK2 PCKA2 CAE2 PFRZ 0 0 Bit 1 PWME1 PPOL1 PCLK1 PCKA1 CAE1 0 0 0 Bit 0 PWME0 PPOL0 PCLK0 PCKA0 CAE0 0 0 0 PCKB2 0 CAE3 PSWAI 0 0 CON45 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 553 Detailed Register Address Map 0x00A0-0x00C7 Pulse Width Modulator 6-Channels (PWM) Map Address 0x00A9 0x00AA 0x00AB 0x00AC 0x00AD 0x00AE 0x00AF 0x00B0 0x00B1 0x00B2 0x00B3 0x00B4 0x00B5 0x00B6 0x00B7 0x00B8 0x00B9 0x00BA 0x00BB 0x00BC 0x00BD 0x00BE 0x00BF0x00C7 Name R PWMSCLB W R PWMSCNTA W R PWMSCNTB W R PWMCNT0 W R PWMCNT1 W R PWMCNT2 W R PWMCNT3 W R PWMCNT4 W R PWMCNT5 W R PWMPER0 W R PWMPER1 W R PWMPER2 W R PWMPER3 W R PWMPER4 W R PWMPER5 W R PWMDTY0 W R PWMDTY1 W R PWMDTY2 W R PWMDTY3 W R PWMDTY4 W R PWMDTY5 W R PWMSDN W R Reserved W Bit 7 Bit 7 0 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 7 0 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 PWMIF 0 Bit 6 6 0 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 PWMIE 0 Bit 5 5 0 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Bit 4 4 0 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Bit 3 3 0 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 Bit 2 2 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 PWM5IN 0 Bit 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PWM5INL 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 0 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 PWM5 ENA 0 0 PWMLVL PWRSTRT 0 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 554 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x00C8-0x00CF Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Map Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 SBR10 SBR2 ILT BERRV 0 Bit 1 SBR9 SBR1 PE BERRIF BERRIE BERRM0 RWU FE Bit 0 SBR8 SBR0 PT BKDIF BKDIE BKDFE SBK PF RAF 0 R0 T0 R 0x00C8 SCIBDH(1) IREN TNP1 TNP0 SBR12 SBR11 W R SBR7 SBR6 SBR5 SBR4 SBR3 0x00C9 SCIBDL1 W R LOOPS SCISWAI RSRC M WAKE 0x00CA SCICR11 W R 0 0 0 0 RXEDGIF 0x00C8 SCIASR1(2) W R 0 0 0 0 RXEDGIE 0x00C9 SCIACR12 W R 0 0 0 0 0 0x00CA SCIACR22 W R 0x00CB SCICR2 TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE W R TDRE TC RDRF IDLE OR 0x00CC SCISR1 W R 0 0 0x00CD SCISR2 AMAP TXPOL RXPOL W R R8 0 0 0 0x00CE SCIDRH T8 W R R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 0x00CF SCIDRL W T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 1. Those registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCI0SR2 register is set to zero 2. Those registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCI0SR2 register is set to one BERRM1 RE NF BRK13 0 R2 T2 TXDIR 0 R1 T1 0x00D0-0x00D7 Reserved Address 0x00D00x00D7 Name Reseved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x00D8-0x00DF Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Map Address 0x00D8 0x00D9 0x00DA 0x00DB Name SPICR1 SPICR2 SPIBR SPISR R W R W R W R W Bit 7 SPIE 0 0 SPIF Bit 6 SPE XFRW SPPR2 0 Bit 5 SPTIE 0 Bit 4 MSTR MODFEN SPPR0 MODF Bit 3 CPOL BIDIROE 0 0 Bit 2 CPHA 0 Bit 1 SSOE SPISWAI SPR1 0 Bit 0 LSBFE SPC0 SPR0 0 SPPR1 SPTEF SPR2 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 555 Detailed Register Address Map 0x00D8-0x00DF Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Map Address 0x00DC 0x00DD 0x00DE 0x00DF Name SPIDRH SPI0DRL Reserved Reserved R W R W R W R W Bit 7 R15 T15 R7 T7 0 0 Bit 6 R14 T14 R6 T6 0 0 Bit 5 R13 T13 R5 T5 0 0 Bit 4 R12 T12 R4 T4 0 0 Bit 3 R11 T11 R3 T3 0 0 Bit 2 R10 T10 R2 T2 0 0 Bit 1 R9 T9 R1 T1 0 0 Bit 0 R8 T8 R0 T0 0 0 0x00E0-0x00FF Reserved Address 0x00E00x00FF Name Reserved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x0100-0x0113 NVM Contol Register (FTMRC) Map Address 0x0100 0x0101 0x0102 0x0103 0x0104 0x0105 0x0106 0x0107 0x0108 0x0109 0x010A 0x010B 0x010C Name FCLKDIV FSEC FCCOBIX FRSV0 FCNFG FERCNFG FSTAT FERSTAT FPROT DFPROT FCCOBHI FCCOBLO FRSV1 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 FDIVLD KEYEN1 0 0 Bit 6 FDIV6 KEYEN0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RNV6 0 Bit 5 FDIV5 RNV5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 FDIV4 RNV4 0 0 Bit 3 FDIV3 RNV3 0 0 0 0 MGBUSY 0 Bit 2 FDIV2 RNV2 Bit 1 FDIV1 SEC1 Bit 0 FDIV0 SEC0 CCOBIX2 0 0 0 RSVD 0 CCOBIX1 0 CCOBIX0 0 CCIE 0 IGNSF 0 FDFD DFDIE FSFD SFDIE CCIF 0 ACCERR 0 FPVIOL 0 MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0 DFDIF FPLS1 DPS1 CCOB9 CCOB1 0 SFDIF FPLS0 DPS0 CCOB8 CCOB0 0 FPOPEN DPOPEN CCOB15 CCOB7 0 FPHDIS 0 FPHS1 0 FPHS0 DPS3 CCOB11 CCOB3 0 FPLDIS DPS2 CCOB10 CCOB2 0 CCOB14 CCOB6 0 CCOB13 CCOB5 0 CCOB12 CCOB4 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 556 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x0100-0x0113 NVM Contol Register (FTMRC) Map Address 0x010D 0x010E 0x010F 0x0110 0x0111 0x0112 0x0113 Name FRSV2 FRSC3 FRSV4 FOPT FRSV5 FRSV6 FRSV7 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 0 0 0 NV7 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 0 NV6 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 NV5 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 0 NV4 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 NV3 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 0 NV2 0 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 0 NV1 0 0 0 Bit 0 0 0 0 NV0 0 0 0 0x0114-0x011F Reserved Address 0x01140x011F Name Reserved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x0120 Interrupt Vector Base Register Address 0x0120 Name IVBR R W Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 IVB_ADDR[7:0] 0x0121-0x013F Reserved Address 0x01140x011F Name Reserved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x0140-0x017F MSCAN Map Address 0x0140 0x0141 0x0142 Name CAN0CTL0 CAN0CTL1 CAN0BTR0 Bit 7 R RXFRM W R CANE W R SJW1 W Bit 6 RXACT Bit 5 CSWAI LOOPB BRP5 Bit 4 SYNCH Bit 3 TIME BORM BRP3 Bit 2 WUPE WUPM BRP2 Bit 1 SLPRQ SLPAK Bit 0 INITRQ INITAK CLKSRC SJW0 LISTEN BRP4 BRP1 BRP0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 557 Detailed Register Address Map 0x0140-0x017F MSCAN Map Address 0x0143 0x0144 0x0145 0x0146 0x0147 0x0148 0x0149 0x014A 0x014B 0x014C 0x014D 0x014E 0x014F 0x01500x0153 Name CAN0BTR1 CAN0RFLG CAN0RIER CAN0TFLG CAN0TIER CAN0TARQ CAN0TAAK CAN0TBSEL CAN0IDAC Reserved CAN0MISC CAN0RXERR CAN0TXERR CAN0IDAR0CAN0IDAR3 Bit 7 R SAMP W R WUPIF W R WUPIE W R 0 W R 0 W R 0 W R 0 W R 0 W R 0 W R 0 W R 0 W R RXERR7 W R TXERR7 W R AC7 W R AM7 W R AC7 W R AM7 W R W R W Bit 6 TSEG22 CSCIF CSCIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RXERR6 TXERR6 Bit 5 TSEG21 RSTAT1 Bit 4 TSEG20 RSTAT0 Bit 3 TSEG13 TSTAT1 Bit 2 TSEG12 TSTAT0 Bit 1 TSEG11 OVRIF OVRIE TXE1 TXEIE1 ABTRQ1 ABTAK1 Bit 0 TSEG10 RXF RXFIE TXE0 TXEIE0 ABTRQ0 ABTAK0 RSTATE1 0 0 0 0 0 RSTATE0 0 0 0 0 0 TSTATE1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RXERR3 TXERR3 TSTATE0 TXE2 TXEIE2 ABTRQ2 ABTAK2 TX2 IDHIT2 0 0 RXERR2 TXERR2 TX1 IDHIT1 0 0 RXERR1 TXERR1 TX0 IDHIT0 0 IDAM1 0 0 RXERR5 TXERR5 IDAM0 0 0 RXERR4 TXERR4 BOHOLD RXERR0 TXERR0 AC6 AM6 AC6 AM6 AC5 AM5 AC5 AM5 AC4 AM4 AC4 AM4 AC3 AM3 AC3 AM3 AC2 AM2 AC2 AM2 AC1 AM1 AC1 AM1 AC0 AM0 AC0 AM0 0x0154- CAN0IDMR00x0157 CAN0IDMR3 0x01580x015B CAN0IDAR4CAN0IDAR7 0x015C- CAN0IDMR40x015F CAN0IDMR7 0x01600x016F 0x01700x017F CAN0RXFG FOREGROUND RECEIVE BUFFER (SeeTable ) FOREGROUND TRANSMIT BUFFER (SeeTable ) CAN0TXFG S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 558 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map MSCAN Foreground Receive and Transmit Buffer Layout Address 0xXXX0 Name Extended ID Standard ID CANxRIDR0 Extended ID Standard ID CANxRIDR1 Extended ID Standard ID CANxRIDR2 Extended ID Standard ID CANxRIDR3 R R W R R W R R W R R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 ID28 ID10 ID20 ID2 ID14 Bit 6 ID27 ID9 ID19 ID1 ID13 Bit 5 ID26 ID8 ID18 ID0 ID12 Bit 4 ID25 ID7 SRR=1 RTR ID11 Bit 3 ID24 ID6 IDE=1 IDE=0 ID10 Bit 2 ID23 ID5 ID17 Bit 1 ID22 ID4 ID16 Bit 0 ID21 ID3 ID15 0xXXX1 ID9 ID8 ID7 0xXXX2 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 RTR 0xXXX3 0xXXX4- CANxRDSR00xXXXB CANxRDSR7 0xXXXC 0xXXXD CANRxDLR Reserved DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DLC3 DB2 DLC2 DB1 DLC1 DB0 DLC0 0xXXXE CANxRTSRH 0xXXXF CANxRTSRL Extended ID CANxTIDR0 Standard ID Extended ID CANxTIDR1 Standard ID Extended ID CANxTIDR2 Standard ID Extended ID CANxTIDR3 Standard ID TSR15 TSR7 TSR14 TSR6 TSR13 TSR5 TSR12 TSR4 TSR11 TSR3 TSR10 TSR2 TSR9 TSR1 TSR8 TSR0 ID28 ID10 ID20 ID2 ID14 ID27 ID9 ID19 ID1 ID13 ID26 ID8 ID18 ID0 ID12 ID25 ID7 SRR=1 RTR ID11 ID24 ID6 IDE=1 IDE=0 ID10 ID23 ID5 ID17 ID22 ID4 ID16 ID21 ID3 ID15 0xXX10 0xXX0x XX10 ID9 ID8 ID7 0xXX12 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 RTR 0xXX13 0xXX14- CANxTDSR0– 0xXX1B CANxTDSR7 0xXX1C 0xXX1D CANxTDLR CANxTTBPR DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DLC3 DB2 DLC2 PRIO2 DB1 DLC1 PRIO1 DB0 DLC0 PRIO0 PRIO7 PRIO6 PRIO5 PRIO4 PRIO3 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 559 Detailed Register Address Map MSCAN Foreground Receive and Transmit Buffer Layout Address 0xXX1E 0xXX1F Name R CANxTTSRH W R CANxTTSRL W Bit 7 TSR15 TSR7 Bit 6 TSR14 TSR6 Bit 5 TSR13 TSR5 Bit 4 TSR12 TSR4 Bit 3 TSR11 TSR3 Bit 2 TSR10 TSR2 Bit 1 TSR9 TSR1 Bit 0 TSR8 TSR0 0x0180-023F Reserved Address 0x01800x023F Name Reserved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4 Address 0x0240 0x0241 0x0242 0x0243 0x0244 0x0245 0x0246 0x0247 Name PTT PTIT DDRT RDRT PERT PPST Reserved PTTRR Bit 7 R PTT7 W R PTIT7 W R DDRT7 W R RDRT7 W R PERT7 W R PPST7 W R 0 W R PTTRR7 W Bit 6 PTT6 PTIT6 Bit 5 PTT5 PTIT5 Bit 4 PTT4 PTIT4 Bit 3 PTT3 PTIT3 Bit 2 PTT2 PTIT2 Bit 1 PTT1 PTIT1 Bit 0 PTT0 PTIT0 DDRT6 RDRT6 PERT6 PPST6 0 DDRT5 RDRT5 PERT5 PPST5 0 DDRT4 RDRT4 PERT4 PPST4 0 DDRT3 RDRT3 PERT3 PPST3 0 0 DDRT2 RDRT2 PERT2 PPST2 0 DDRT1 RDRT1 PERT1 PPST1 0 DDRT0 RDRT0 PERT0 PPST0 0 PTTRR6 PTTRR5 PTTRR4 PTTRR2 PTTRR1 PTTRR0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 560 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4 Address 0x0248 0x0249 0x024A 0x024B 0x024C 0x024D 0x024E 0x024F 0x0250 0x0251 0x0252 0x0253 0x0254 0x0255 0x0256 0x0257 0x0258 0x0259 0x025A 0x025B 0x025C 0x025D 0x025E 0x025F Name PTS PTIS DDRS RDRS PERS PPSS WOMS Reserved PTM PTIM DDRM RDRM PERM PPSM WOMM MODRR PTP PTIP DDRP RDRP PERP PPSP PIEP PIFP R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 PTS7 PTIS7 Bit 6 PTS6 PTIS6 Bit 5 PTS5 PTIS5 Bit 4 PTS4 PTIS4 Bit 3 PTS3 PTIS3 Bit 2 PTS2 PTIS2 Bit 1 PTS1 PTIS1 Bit 0 PTS0 PTIS0 DDRS7 RDRS7 PERS7 PPSS7 WOMS7 0 DDRS6 RDRS6 PERS6 PPSS6 WOMS6 0 DDRS5 RDRS5 PERS5 PPSS5 WOMS5 0 DDRS4 RDRS4 PERS4 PPSS4 WOMS4 0 DDRS3 RDRS3 PERS3 PPSS3 WOMS3 0 DDRS2 RDRS2 PERS2 PPSS2 WOMS2 0 DDRS1 RDRS1 PERS1 PPSS1 WOMS1 0 DDRS0 RDRS0 PERS0 PPSS0 WOMS0 0 PTM7 PTIM7 PTM6 PTIM6 PTM5 PTIM5 PTM4 PTIM4 PTM3 PTIM3 PTM2 PTIM2 PTM1 PTIM1 PTM0 PTIM0 DDRM7 RDRM7 PERM7 PPSM7 WOMM7 MODRR7 PTP7 PTIP7 DDRM6 RDRM6 PERM6 PPSM6 WOMM6 MODRR6 PTP6 PTIP6 DDRM5 RDRM5 PERM5 PPSM5 WOMM5 0 DDRM4 RDRM4 PERM4 PPSM4 WOMM4 MODRR4 PTP4 PTIP4 DDRM3 RDRM3 PERM3 PPSM3 WOMM3 0 DDRM2 RDRM2 PERM2 PPSM2 WOMM2 0 DDRM1 RDRM1 PERM1 PPSM1 WOMM1 0 DDRM0 RDRM0 PERM0 PPSM0 WOMM0 0 PTP5 PTIP5 PTP3 PTIP3 PTP2 PTIP2 PTP1 PTIP1 PTP0 PTIP0 DDRP7 RDRP7 PERP7 PPSP7 PIEP7 PIFP7 DDRP6 RDRP6 PERP6 PPSP6 PIEP6 PIFP6 DDRP5 RDRP5 PERP5 PPSP5 PIEP5 PIFP5 DDRP4 RDRP4 PERP4 PPSP4 PIEP4 PIFP4 DDRP3 RDRP3 PERP3 PPSP3 PIEP3 PIFP3 DDRP2 RDRP2 PERP2 PPSP2 PIEP2 PIFP2 DDRP1 RDRP1 PERP1 PPSP1 PIEP1 PIFP1 DDRP0 RDRP0 PERP0 PPSS0 PIEP0 PIFP0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 561 Detailed Register Address Map 0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4 Address 0x0260 0x0261 0x0262 0x0263 0x0264 0x0265 0x0266 0x0267 0x0268 0x0269 0x026A 0x026B 0x026C 0x026D 0x026E 0x026f 0x0270 0x0271 0x0272 0x0273 0x0274 0x0275 Name Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved PTJ PTIJ DDRJ RDRJ PERJ PPSJ PIEJ PIFJ PT0AD0 PT1AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR1AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR1AD0 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PT0AD0 5 PT1AD0 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PT0AD0 4 PT1AD0 4 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PT0AD0 3 PT1AD0 3 Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTJ7 PTIJ7 PTJ6 PTIJ6 PTJ2 PTIJ12 PTJ1 PTIJ1 PTJ0 PTIJ0 DDRJ7 RDRJ7 PERJ7 PPSJ7 PIEJ7 PIFJ7 PT0AD0 7 PT1AD0 7 DDRJ6 RDRJ6 PERJ6 PPSJ6 PIEJ6 PIFJ6 PT0AD0 6 PT1AD0 6 DDRJ2 RDRJ2 PERJ2 PPSJ2 PIEJ2 PIFJ2 PT0AD0 2 PT1AD0 2 DDRJ1 RDRJ1 PERJ1 PPSJ1 PIEJ1 PIFJ1 PT0AD0 1 PT1AD0 1 DDRJ0 RDRJ0 PERJ0 PPSJ0 PIEJ0 PIFJ0 PT0AD0 0 PT1AD0 0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 DDR0AD0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 DDR1AD0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 RDR0AD0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 RDR1AD0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 562 Freescale Semiconductor Detailed Register Address Map 0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4 Address 0x0276 0x0277 0x02780x027F Name PER0AD0 PER1AD0 Reserved Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 R PER0AD0 PER0AD0 PER0AD0 PER0AD0 PER0AD0 PER0AD0 PER0AD0 PER0AD0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 W R PER1AD0 PER1AD0 PER1AD0 PER1AD0 PER1AD0 PER1AD0 PER1AD0 PER1AD0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 W R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W 0x0280-0x02EF Reserved Address 0x02800x02EF Name Reserved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 0x02F0-0x02FF Clock and Power Management Unit (CPMU) Map 2 of 2 Address 0x02F0 0x02F1 Name CPMUHTCL CPMULVCTL Bit 7 R 0 W R 0 W R APICLK W R APITR5 W R APIR15 W R APIR7 W R 0 W R HTOEN W R W R W R OSCE W R 0 W R 0 W Bit 6 0 0 0 Bit 5 VSEL 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 HTEN 0 Bit 2 HTDS LVDS Bit 1 HTIE LVIE APIE 0 Bit 0 HTIF LVIF APIF 0 0x02F2 CPMUAPICTL 0x02F3 0x02F4 0x02F5 0x02F6 0x02F7 0x02F8 0x02F9 0x02FA 0x02FB 0x02FC VREGAPITR CPMUAPIRH CPMUAPIRL Reserved CPMUHTTR CPMU IRCTRIMH CPMU IRCTRIML CPMUOSC CPMUPROT Reserved APIFES APITR2 APIR12 APIR4 0 0 APIEA APITR1 APIR11 APIR3 0 APIFE APITR0 APIR10 APIR2 0 APITR4 APIR14 APIR6 0 0 APITR3 APIR13 APIR5 0 0 APIR9 APIR1 0 APIR8 APIR0 0 HTTR3 0 HTTR2 0 HTTR1 HTTR0 TCTRIM[3:0] IRCTRIM[9:8] IRCTRIM[7:0] OSCBW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OSCFILT[4:0] 0 0 0 0 PROT 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 Freescale Semiconductor 563 Detailed Register Address Map 0x0300-0x03FF Reserved Address 0x03000x03FF Name Reserved R W Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 S12P-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 1.13 564 Freescale Semiconductor How to Reach Us: USA/Europe/Locations not listed: Freescale Semiconductor Literature Distribution P.O. Box 5405, Denver, Colorado 80217 1-800-521-6274 or 480-768-2130 Japan: Freescale Semiconductor Japan Ltd. SPS, Technical Information Center 3-20-1, Minami-Azabu Minato-ku Tokyo 106-8573, Japan 81-3-3440-3569 Asia/Pacific: Freescale Semiconductor H.K. Ltd. 2 Dai King Street Tai Po Industrial Estate Tai Po, N.T. Hong Kong 852-26668334 Learn More: For more information about Freescale Semiconductor products, please visit http://www.freescale.com Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software implementers to use Freescale Semiconductor products. There are no express or implied copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits or integrated circuits based on the information in this document. Freescale Semiconductor reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. Freescale Semiconductor makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Freescale Semiconductor assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. “Typical” parameters which may be provided in Freescale Semiconductor data sheets and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including “Typicals” must be validated for each customer application by customer’s technical experts. Freescale Semiconductor does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Freescale Semiconductor products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Freescale Semiconductor product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Freescale Semiconductor products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Freescale Semiconductor and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Freescale Semiconductor was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part. Freescale™ and the Freescale logo are trademarks of Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. © Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. 2010